Home

Minolta Di750 All-In

Contents

1. y Align original on ED jfa feos 1600 E COUNT SET Count Set SE EES 1 rm EC Notice message gt GA TONER YPM CALL 4 ay D Folder keys gt KS Memory indicator OUTPUT COPY MODE COPY DENSI LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION T Ee User 100 _ Special Original Output icon AD ERR A ams a Te ORIGINAL
2. es o ot Mee STATUS OUTPUT C P Y MODE COPY DENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION EDH nea 1 00 a eo es RECH bo as SOEN 2 gt 0 NORMA zoom Ceni al APPLI cg a a ee oa Sam m m
3. R O CO COUNT SET Corrs J OUTPUT NOPT DENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIE FUNCTION E LA USERI 1 00 ET d 1 8 5x11 e SPECIAL A AMS tae Ele TEP ORIGINA i E 5x HAT d NORMA ZOOM P 65x14 fe tee APPLI STAN E ZU 8 5x11 Ll SEES od y RE 11x17 Z OFF 1 Open the document handler 2 Place original FACE DOWN on the platen glass then close the document handler IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION 3 Make the desired copying selections and select 1 1 or 1 2 copy mode 4 Touch STORE on the Basic Screen to highlight it 5 P
4. STATUS GUTPUT WEE ENEE I LENS TODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION EDH USERI 1 00 AN Ware S ECH Kan e E SEN 2 gt 0 NORMA Zoom gd 83x14 om mA ee STABLE me L RE mo ROTATION a aise nae 1 Turn power on by pressing the Power switches of the two copiers 2 Confirm that both copiers are ready to copy with the Basic Screen displayed 3 Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen of either copier to display the Finisher Mode Selection Screen 4 Touch TANDEM on the Finisher Mode Selection
5. vru E So TENS MODE COPY Size FUNCTION ERR sent 1 00 All are S D ED E HAT 2m Normaj zoom 85x14 om ms APPUI STAPLE EIS v RE a ROTATION en SE EE aon The Basic Screen displays after warm up The initial settings show on the next page Except for Print Quantity all initial settings can be changed by the key operator The following modes can be accessed from this screen Copy Mode Copy Density Lens Mode Copy Size Special Original Application Output Menu 3 10 Machine Information Machine Information Initial Settin
6. ZED STATUS OUTPUT COPY MODE COPY DENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION EDH USERT 1 00 ya Al fae MCs Le eae OUT o Norman zoom PWC 8 5x14 APPLI STAPLE me v RE 11x17 5 ROTATION Dir EED 1 1 APS STORE 2 Touch BYPASS then touch PAPER TYPE SIZE The Paper Type Size Selection Screen will be displayed
7. FREE STATUS Execute shut off mode SSES OUTPUT SEET MODE REM SE FUNCTION D ar YES NO SPECIAL A 2 gt 2 Easa ORIGINA LIX OUTE UT St norna zoom C GGO7 Ce mmm APPL LIX j STAPLE HS v RE 11x17 Ej ROTATION 9 Touch YES The copier returns to the OFF state and copying is disabled Copier Management 5 7 Copier Management Counter List This function allows you to view the current indication of the following items as a list on the touch panel Total counter Copier counter Printer counter Counter start date Check the list then print it from the
8. STATUS OUTPUT COPY MODE COPYDENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION ee eme Al CRH C5 USERL 1 00 G 1 kg SS Ss ue be fi G LN HAT Sp E NORMA ZOOM 2 B 5x14 m APPLI STAPLE SZ 5x115 ee SORT 1 gt 2 y RE 11x17 E OFF 1 Touch STORE on the Basic Screen to highlight it 2 Make the desired copying selections 3 Position originals FACE UP on EDH If the number of originals exceeds 100 divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block
9. Dee oricinaccounr All Te L ee OUTPUT COPY MODE SUE DENSITY LENS MODE copy OUTPUT COPY MODE SCDE ONG LENS MODE Kat RS ERD deer 1 00 fall T EG RESCH 1 00 A 2b A ANS 85x41 A 21 gt 2 A AMS 185x11 apeu Gr norna zoom DU GC apeu 2O orna zoom Fa 88x14 _ STAPLE me L RE 11x17 STAPLE me L RE 517 E SORT ECS EEB E Ez awe EEB E
10. Pre AR o scan origina COUNT SET ORE b a g complete ADD PAPER 01 i FREE on 02 o STATUS OUTPUT C7PY MODE f COPY DENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION USER2 AN EDH G USERI 1 00 G 1 S IS AJ wg Wee ORINA 5x oe 2 gt 0 Normaj zoom 85x14 Ce m APPL 5x11 Z STAPLE mba S sg BI ua ROTATION In this case you can still continue the reserve job setting 1 Touch ADD PAPER to display the Basic Screen for the print job 2 Confirm the empty tray and supply the paper
11. Basic Screen Finisher Mode Selection Screen Select finisher mode Staple position displayed as the placed originals JOB 10 EXIT TRAY STAPLE lt 1POS gt STAPLE lt 2POS gt OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt a _ COVER 5 i GROUP OUTPUT COPY MC SUB J SHEET EDY A ESAN PIE i D y 7 STAPLING A IN amp FOLDING IPE v IV FOLDING RECALL STANDARD CANCEL OK GINAN OUNT 0 NG
12. O Scan and store original into memory then print all the pages collectively Store up to 1500 pages in memory unless memory overflow occurs O Use EDH Store mode is also available in this case use platen glass or EDH O AMS is automatically selected CT Copy mode 1 2 or 2 2 mode only CT Folding or Stapling amp Folding output mode is available when copier is equipped with FN 4 O Trimming output mode is available when the finisher is equipped with the Trimming unit TMG 1 O Original size One sided or two sided letter sheets 8 5 x11 O Copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions APS Group Rotation Sort Face Up 1 1 2 1 Cover mode in Booklet using Cover Inserter A CT Incompatible Special Originals Resolution Very high Mixed Original SDF Tab Paper O Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion
13. Align original on EDH unit ORIGINAL COUNT 0 MEMORY mY d 1 status OUTPUT Cory EE ENEE LE NODE CORTET FONCTION EDIT est 1 00 all Aree AJ Cas ca SA opo Sri morma Zoom E 8 5x14 Ce z APPLI STARRE DIS v RE fe me sen oo lt lt eg Touch ROTATION OFF on the Basic Screen to highlight it The Rotation icon will go out and the Rotation function will be canceled NOTE ROTATION OFF is initially set to activate deactivate 90 Rotation only If desired key operator can set ROTATION OFF to activate deactivate 180 Rotation also See p 14 40 to p 14 45 To resume automatic Rotation Touch ROTATION OFF on the Basic Screen to deselect it The Rotation icon will be displayed and the Rotation function will be reactivated Basic Operations 6 33 Basic Operations Check Mode and Proof Copy
14. cover attached 4 AN AN Copied sets with cover attached in Folding or Stapling amp Folding mode d Basic Screen Finisher Mode Selection Screen Align original on EDH u Select finisher mode Staple position displayed as the placed originals EXIT TRAY STAPLE lt 1POS gt STAPLE lt 2POS gt OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt E le OPT MODE SUB ail Al A AJ A or SHEET TRAY 7 A A Ai A SORT il J STAPLING be MAIN sil bw IV V Vi SNE TRAY bh V Vv Ata FOLDING HDD RECALL Zoo ee Le 7 16 Output Modes Output Modes Cover Inserter A continued Cover Sheet Insert Selection Screen JOBIO OUTPUT APPLI L cover sheet COYER SHEET FRONT BACK BACK 1 Close the EDH securely then press Panel Reset 2 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Finisher Mode Selection Screen 3 Touch COVER SHEET to display the Cover Sheet Insert Selection Screen 4 Touch FRONT FRONT BACK or BACK to highlight it then touch OK to restore the Finisher Mode Selection Screen 5 Touch OK on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen The Basic Sc
15. High mode P Increase 2 kel AS H Ba H Ap We STD be i d Z Folded Yery High mode d Photo Kl original Tab paper Fi BER A4 B5 Tab paper D WHOLE 600 dpi Text SDF ar i AREA STANDARD CANCEL J oK Popup menu for Tab paper mode JOB 10 Nd ORIGINAL 85x14 85x1 85x11 A3 B4 AAR Non STD size C AA B5 Tab paper B 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original Screen 2 Touch Non STD Size or Tab paper 3 Touch the desired size key When selecting WHOLE AREA on the Non STD size mode menu the copier scans the whole area of the platen glass and copies with the paper size or magnification ratio currently selected 4 Touch OK on the popup menu of the size keys 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 6 Make other compatible selections 7 Position original s FACE UP in the document han
16. e mm sia Srmode aple po on displayed a e placed origina JOB 10 EXIT TRAY STAPLE lt 1POS gt STAPLE lt 2POS gt OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt 01 a COYER SUB A A A A SHEET TRAT A A A A SORT STAPLING FS sais sl IW IV V IN amp FOLDING D TRAY bw V v Vy FOLDING qi RECALL EZ K s od cance ok _ Stapling amp Folding Finisher Mode Selection Screen Align original on EDH u ele ode a 9 9 aple po on displayed a e placed origina JOB 10 EXIT TRAY STAPLE lt 1POS gt STAPLE lt 2POS gt OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt SE ul COYER SHEET R gt SUB J TRAY SORT il j STAPLING ea Kom sl amp FOLDING TRAY e FOLDING HDD RECALL STORE STANDARD _CANCEL OK
17. 2 E TRR OUTPUT Ke F STAPLE HI 2 FOLDING HDD RECALL sort Ama store STANDARD _CANCEL 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Finisher Mode Selection Screen 2 Touch SUB TRAY to display the popup menu OUTPUT lt SUB TRAY gt 3 Touch the desired key s on the popup menu to specify one of the four output modes To select Non sort and face down exit touch FACE DOWN To select Non sort and face up exit touch FACE UP To select Group and face down exit touch GROUP and FACE DOWN To select Group and face up exit touch GROUP and FACE UP 4 Touch OK on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen The selection made in output mode using secondary sub tray will be reflected in the OUTPUT icon area of the Basic Screen 5 Enter the desired print quantity 6 Position originals in the document handler and make copying selections as required When using Store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 29 7 Press Start A CAUTION When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected remove the copied sets while the paper is exiting otherwise mishandled paper will occur 7 12 Output Modes Output Modes Folding Stapling amp Folding and Trimming M
18. y Z FACE sl ISTAPLING CP OUTPUT 1 MAIN amp FOLDING STAPLE ZE E FOLDING SORT 2 SORT Output Modes 7 11 Output Modes Output Modes Using Secondary Sub Tray continued Group Face up Finisher Mode Selection Screen Align original on EDH u se OUTPUT COPY MODE JOB 10 EXIT TRAY OUTPUT lt SUB TRAY gt OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt f cover GROUP SHEET GROUP SUB TRAY SORT CH
19. Basic Operations 6 21 Basic Operations Reserve continued Set Reserve Job continued The FREE JOB key may be used to set the Reserve job only when another job is in progress otherwise the key appears grayed out Set the Reserve job as shown below 1 Touch FREE JOB to display the Reserve Job Setting Screen 2 Set the desired copying conditions for the reserve job When the Reserve Job Setting Screen is displayed all keys on the LCD and Control panel will function for the reserve job NOTE When trouble occurs while setting the reserve job the PRINT or SCAN JOB key changes to JAM ADD PAPER key on the Basic Screen See p 6 25 to p 6 26 3 Position original s FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass after completing to scan for the current job The message Ready to copy will be displayed on the Basic Screen 4 Press Start The original for the reserve job will be scanned NOTE When the message Please load size paper in any tray except tray is displayed load the specified paper into the tray 5 When the scanning for the reserve job is completed the Basic Screen for the current printing job is restored 6 Repeat step 2 to 4 to reserve more than one job 7 Copying on the reserve job will start automatically after completing the current job 6 22 Basic Operations Basic Op
20. OUTPUT COPY MODY COPY DENSITY fan ENS MODE COPY SIZE e All Se EDH A 2 Thick E Casa 2 8 5x14 RECY RSR STAPLE 1 r m SORT FUNCTION ROTATION OFF STORE Light original Normal Dark original Basic Operations 6 7 Basic Operations Copy Density continued Density Shift Density shift divides each of nine density levels into two levels of lighter and three levels of darker Density shift can be used in 4 density modes Auto Text photo Text Photo and Increase contrast Density shift O Density shift 1 gt l Density shift 2 gt l CET EE Density shift 3 lt Density shift 4 lt Density shift 5 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL to display the Special Original Screen 2 Select the density mode To select the Auto Text Photo mode touch AUTO to highlight it then press P Utility The following message wil
21. LSTATUS J OUTPUT COPY MODE Y SIZE FUNCTION D gare YES NO SPECIAL A SNE Fes ORIGINA LIX HAT 21 gt went Zoom FIT SS Cl APPLI LIX ES STAPLE HS Vv RE 11x17 EJ ROTATION Release Manual Shut Off Press Energy Saver On Off The Manual shut off will be released with the Energy Saver On Off LED turned off and the LCD screen displayed 5 4 Copier Management Copier Management Entering an ECM Password An ECM password is required only when the Electronic Copy Monitor ECM feature is activated a User Password is assigned and Enter E C M password is displayed on the touch screen COUNT SET STATE OUTPUT COPY MODE COPY DENSITY J LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION ees e EDH USERI 1 A A A 2 gt AJ Cms J ar SPECIAL THICK OUTPUT Ge RE Geh 2 gt 0 NORMAI ZOOM S APPLI 4 8 5x11 5 STAPLE EIS RE NIE ROTATION v acs Sam PE E geng 1 Enter your 8 digit ECM password using the keypad If the ECM password is invalid the copier will reset to the Initial mode In that case enter the correct password or contact the key operator 2 Press Start once to display your current copy count and copy limit for 3 sec Current count
22. Touch the desired tray key APS will go out and AMS will be highlighted When selecting BYPASS see p 6 18 p 6 20 To restore the APS mode touch APS AMS will go out and APS will be highlighted NOTE When UNIV is displayed on the tray key as the copy size indication program the copy size as described in the next page Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the document handler as required When all settings are acceptable press Start from the Basic Screen Basic Operations 6 17 Basic Operations Copy Size continued Selecting Paper Type Size for Multi sheet Bypass Tray 1 Open the Multi sheet bypass tray and load the copy paper on the tray See p 6 41 p 6 42 for further details Basic Screen COUNT SET
23. a825 Le E EES Kal SES E 7 14 Output Modes Output Modes Folding Stapling amp Folding and Trimming Modes continued 1 Close the EDH securely then press Panel Reset 2 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Finisher Mode Selection Screen 3 Touch STAPLING amp FOLDING or FOLDING as desired When selecting STAPLING amp FOLDING the machine with the Trimming unit installed selects TRIM automatically To cancel the trimming mode touch TRIM to deselect it When selecting FOLDING the machine with the Trimming unit installed does not automatically select TRIM Touch TRIM to highlight it if desired NOTE Selecting FOLDING or STAPLING amp FOLDING will automatically switch the output tray to Booklet tray Notice that the arrow pointing to the MAIN TRAY shifts to the Booklet tray 4 Touch OK on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen The Basic Screen will be restored and the selection made in the output mode will be reflected in the OUTPUT icon area 5 Select additional copying fe
24. STAMP WATERMARK OVERLAY Non image Area Erase EC TENT Fi q DS D All image Wei WATERMARK lt OVERLAY Chapter reverse Tal BM mea STAMP NUMBERING L De Image Shift eme EA SC SET DATED Tee WATERMAR OYERLAY eg RF FramelFold Stamp al NUMBERING NUMBERING MEMORY SA Erasure z Overlay ALL 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Stamp Overlay The Stamp Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed 3 Touch OVERLAY MEMORY to display the Overlaying Image Selection Screen NOTE Without HDD the OVERLAY MEMORY key will be dimmed on the Stamp Overlay Selection Screen to show inactivity Overlaying Image Selection Screen L Stamp Overlay ABCDI111 1999 11 03 ABCDI111 1999 11 03 ABCDI111 1999 11 03 ABCD2222 1999 11 17 ABCD2222 1999 11 17 ABCD2222 1999 11 17 EFGH3333 1999 11 19 EFGH3333 1999 11 19 EFGH3333 1999 11 19 ABCD2222 1999 11 17 ABCD2222 1999 11 17 ABCD2222 1999 11 17 EFGH3333 1999 11 19 EFGH3333 1999 11 19 EFGH3333 1999 11 19 e Coet aioe 4 Select the desired overlaying image data to highlight it Use up down arrow key to scroll if needed 5 Touch OK to retu
25. Front side of the fixing unit A CAUTION acma A ATTENTION A PRECAUCION A PRECAUCION A CAUTION A CUIDADO A CAUTION AcuIDADO yA DO NOT put your hand between the main body and developing fixing unit otherwise you may be injured The conveyance fixing unit is heavy Use care and draw it out gently otherwise you may be injured Safety Information 2 3 Safety Information Machine Labels continued Label Locations continued A CAUTION A ATTENTION E NS DO NOT put your hand between the main body and tray otherwise you may be injured ES A CAUTION A CAUTION A ATTENTION A ATTENTION A PRECAUCI N A PRECAUCION A CUIDADO FN 104 FN 4 AA CAUTION Use care after opening the paper exit outlet DO NOT 2 put your hand into it FN 4only RA otherwise you may be injured AA CAUTION Inside the lower paper exit outlet FN 4 Finisher is the roller drive unit DO NOT put your hand into it otherwise you may be injured 2 4 Safety Information Safety Information Machine Labels continued Label Locations continued e Avoid getting burned Do not touch any machine area that you are advised not to touch by a warning caution label e Do no
26. 123 123 A B c D E F G H l J Name Name 2KC5G uRvbubsvbxebzHrR ib Hi Limit 8 Limit 99999 ofif 2f f 4 sfie 7fisjis Password Duplication Screen Name Duplication Screen 123 123 F G H 1 J h Password 12345 PE ay RE SET Name ame 2KC5G Ze zyic ioyi pie Limit Limit 99999 SP Gf 74 849 CANCEL ox CANCEL OK Key Operator Mode 14 17 Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 continued E C M Data Edit 1 continued 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 4 E C M function setting The ECM Master Key Code Screen displays if a code is required 3 Enter your 8 digit ECM master key code then touch OK to display the ECM Setting Menu Screen See note 2 NOTES 1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid A doit password 2 H an invalid ECM master key code is entered contin
27. Recycled paper is used for the inside pages of this book Di750 Operator s Manual ENERGY STAR Program The ENERGY STAR Program has been established to encourage the widespread and voluntary use of energy efficient technologies that reduce Enerji energy consumption and prevent pollution As an ENERGY STAR Partner we have determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency grounding it on the following features Auto Low Power This function conserves energy by lowering the set temperature of the fixing unit In the standard setting Auto Low Power operates automatically when 15 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time The time period for the Auto Low Power function can be set for 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes 120 minutes or 240 minutes See p 5 2 for details Automatic Shut Off This function achieves further energy conservation by partially turning OFF the power supply thereby reducing energy consumption to 20W or less In the standard setting Automatic Shut Off follows Auto Low Power operating automatically when 90 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time The time period for the Automatic Shut Off function can be set for 30 minutes 60
28. COVERS INSERT S PAGE SETTING Enter by keypad Shoetcover Ta Bypass THICK TRAY COLOR Re All image FRONT BACK Chapter image ais e T COPY copy 584 cory pl B INSERT image Shit a FRONT BACK el SLANE BLANK BLANK doh ez OW Seer bs E Jes eege E ALL CHANGE OF THE CHANGE OF THE CLEAR J CANCEL COVERS TRAY INSERTION TRAY CANCEL Sheet Cover Insertion Screen with FRONT COPY BACK BLANK and COPY INSERT selected o and o ertio ee BOOK 30610 er page ber to be erted MARK Jf Application LS C Insertion COYERS INSERT S f PAGE SETTING Enter by keypad 1 15 d Bypass THICK TRAY1 COLOR went P5 P8 P14 fra d FRONT BACK 2 corr 7 erh u fence FRONT BACK BLANK BLANK BLANK 4 aj S nd il gl INSERT DELETE SET CHANGE OF THE CHANGE OF THE COVERS TRAY INSERTION TRAY CANCEL Max insertion locations 30 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 To
29. THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR CHAPTER I SUBCHAPTER J CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 1 LASER KLASSE 1 L 9521 Rim 2 16 Safety Information Safety Information Regulations continued Ozone Release NOTE Locate the Machine in a Well Ventilated Room A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of this machine An unpleasant odor may however be created in poorly ventilated rooms during extensive machine operations For a comfortable healthy and safe operating environment it is recommended that the room well ventilated REMARQUE Placer l appareil dans une pi ce largement ventil e Une quantit d ozone n gligable est d gag e pendant le fonctionnement de appareil quand celui ci est utilis normalement Cependant une odeur d sagr able peut tre ressentie dans les pi ces dont l a ration est insuffisante et lorsque une utilisation prolong e de l appareil est effectu e Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement r unissant des conditions de confort sant et de s curit il est pr f rable de bien a rer la pi ce ou se trouve l appareil Safety Information 2 17 Section 3 Machine Information Machine Configuration External Machine Call Outs Internal Machine Call Outs Optional Equipment Site Requirements Control Panel Layout Touch Screen Basic Screen Initial Settings Pan
30. e ac e of follo Timer Interrupt Password Setting 5 SE SE Control Panel Adjustment 10 DE VE Tray Size Setting 11 5 toce stes program mamary ANIO contro poner eset Energy Saver Setting 12 Zz KS Memory Switch Setting 13 elect one of following Machine Management List Print 14 11 Tray size settin g 16 Side 2 tens adjustment 12 Energy saver setting PREE Side 2 Lens Adjustment 16 13 Memory switch setting 18 HDD management setting Finisher Adjustment 17 14 Machine management list print HDD Management Setting 18 Lal Key Operator ECM Form Key Operator Mode 14 1 Key Operator Mode To the Key Operator The key operator is trained to handle all special key operator functions that are not accessible to the general user such as monitoring overall copier activity machine performance and service information modifying machine settings and controlling user activity for billing purposes A unique 4 digit key operator password is normally set by service at installation If the unique code is not set by service the copier will not display Key Operator Password Entry Screen when the Key Operator mode is being accessed and a key operator password will not be required A service set 8 digit ECM master key code must be entered by the key operator to access the Electronic Copy M
31. Combination samples vlt 9 SE SSC ml SURVEYOR S 2 REPORT SURVEYOR S REPORT Originals Copies FRONT amp BACK COVERS COPIED SEN a0 SEN See SURVEYOR S 1 7 REPORT SURVEYOR gt Originals Copies FRONT amp BACK COVERS BLANK H SURVEYOR S REPORT e Originals Copies BACK COVER COPIED SEI 9 SURVEYOR S ar suavevor s af j REPORT REPORT LJ gt Originals Copies BACK COVER BLANK 0 sere SURVEYOR S H suavevor s Da P REPORT euer Originals Copies COPY SHEET INSERTION Originals Copies BLANK SHEET INSERTION Originals SURVEYOR S REPORT Copies FRONT amp BACK COVERS COPIED AND COPY SHEET INSERTION 10 sere 3 4 H SURVEYOR S REPORT gt 7 2 zl 3 SURVEYOR S 31 2 SURVEYOR S REPORT REPORT Originals Copies FRONT amp BACK COVERS BLANK AND BLANK SHEET INSERTION Applications 9 5 Applications Sheet Cover Insertion continued Application Selection Screen Sheet Cover Insertion Screen o andio o BOOK 20810 er page ber to be erted MARK f Application L S C Insertion FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT
32. Key Operator Mode 14 21 Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 continued E C M Function Setting 3 Use this function to turn ECM On or Off or to select whether the copier will stop at the time the count limit is reached or after the current copy job is completed ECM Setting Menu Screen ECM Function Setting Screen elect one of following ecn data edit 2 ecn all count reset E C M function setting Switching the ECM ONIOFF Select effect of reaching the copy limit ECM On ECM Off Immediately After job Warning PREYIOUS ech Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 4 E C M function setting The ECM Master Key Code Screen displays if a code is required 3 Enter your 8 digit ECM master key code then touch OK to display the ECM Setting Menu Screen See note 2 4 Touch 3 E C M function setting The ECM Function Setting Screen will be displayed 5 Touch ECM On to activate ECM or touch ECM Off to de activate ECM The selected key will be highlighted 6 Touch Immediately to stop the machine when the copy limit is reached In this case the paper in process will be completed and Enter ECM password will display after the copier stops Touch After job to stop the machine after the current job is completed when copy limit
33. A D cf D A cf D K k M N K M N Enea u v Hf x u WE x D H 3 D H 3 1 1 RA LE WS 1 CHARACTEI H DI DELETE RETURN TO CANCEL PASSWORD SCREEN 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Menu Screen 2 Touch HDD STORE The Image Data Password Entry Screen will be displayed 3 Enter the desired Image data password in up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct password 4 If the password is correct touch OK to display the Job Name Entry Screen Enter the desired job name in up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct job name 5 If the job name is correct touch OK twice to return to the Basic Screen 6 Select the desired copying conditions then enter the desired print quantity 7 Position original s FACE UP in the document handler or FACE DOWN on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 While using Program job the scanned and output data can be stored in HDD See p 9 22 Server Function 11 7 Server Function Image Store amp Output Mode continued Image Data Storing Screen Image Data Storing Screen ooch oo Te 8 Press Start to scan and then print When the Sto
34. 18 Rotation Select to activate the Rotation function activate Rotation only when APS AMS functions or activate Rotation only when APS AMS Reduce functions 19 Rotation 180 angle Set Orientation correction to function anytime or when Rotation is disabled 20 B6R size original type Select the orientation of the B6R size original 21 A3 B4 11x17 8 5x14 F4 orig type Select the orientation of the A3 B4 11 x17 8 5 x14 or F4 size original 22 Staple mode reset function Staple mode is automatically canceled after a job is completed with Staple sort mode ON Sort mode is selected Key Operator Mode 14 43 Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 continued 23 Job offset operating Set the copier to offset the copies of different jobs when outputting multiple reserve jobs in succession 24 Continuation print Set the copier to output multiple reserve jobs in succession 25 SDF Auto start Select to feed the SDF original automatically when placed on the EDH or press Start to feed the SDF original 26 Key click sound Activate or deactivate the sound each time a key is pressed on the touch panel 27 1 SHOT indication time Select the SHOT indication time function 28 Energy saver screen Select the screen to display when pressing the Energy Saver On Off key 29 Start key latch function Activate or deactivate the latch function 30 Stop key function Select to display or not to
35. O MACHINE MODIFICATION Do not modify the machine in any way or remove any part or screw and never attempt to perform any maintenance function that is not specifically described in this manual Do not connect the machine with any options other than those specified 2 8 Safety Information Safety Information Routine Safety A CAUTION FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN MACHINE DAMAGE OVERHEATING AND OR PERSONAL INJURY O PERIODIC CHECK Check for loose connection or excessive heat on power plug damage to power cord and or plug creased frayed scratched or cut etc Be sure the plug is inserted fully and ground wire is connected correctly If any abnormality occurs do not continue to operate the machine O SERVICE MESSAGES If a service message displays turn the machine off disconnect the power cord from the outlet and report the condition to your service representative O TONER Check to be sure toner in storage is out of the reach of children or anyone incapable of using supplies safely Although toner is nontoxic do not inhale toner or allow it to come in contact with eyes If inhalation or eye contact occurs immediately consult a physician Please refer to the appropriate material safety data sheet for additional toner safety information O PAPER Check paper to be sure it is according to specifications outlined in Section 4 O CLEANING MATERIALS Check the type of cleaning material us
36. O Paper weight 16 24 Ib CT Paper capacity for 20 Ib 200 sheets Booklet Tray FN 4 Finisher only e Folding Mode CT Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm CT Paper weight 16 24 lb Special stock 20 lb paper is recommended CT Number of Folding sheet 3 sheets max CT Booklet tray capacity Approx 100 sheets max 33 sets max of 3 sheet folded booklet 33 x 3 99 sheets 50 sets max of 2 sheet folded booklet 50 x 2 100 sheets e Stapling amp Folding Mode O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm CT Paper weight 16 24 lb Special stock 20 lb paper is recommended CT Number of Folding sheet 16 sheets max using 20 Ib paper only 15 sheets max a thick cover paper included CT Booklet tray capacity Approx 100 sheets max 20 sets max of 5 sheet folded booklet 20 x 5 100 sheets 10 sets max of 10 sheet folded booklet 10 x 10 100 sheets 6 sets max of 16 sheet folded booklet 6 x 16 96 sheets Cover Inserter A O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A4 A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm CT Paper weight in cover sheet mode 13 110 Ib 200g m thick paper O Paper weight in manual staple 16 24 Ib Output Modes 7 3 Output Modes FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Specifications continued Trimming Unit FN 4 Finisher only e Trimming Mode CT Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A4R 8 27 x11 69 210m
37. Scan and store originals into memory g Use EDH Store mode is also available in this case use platen glass or EDH g AMS is automatically selected O Original Copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions APS Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Folding Stapling amp Folding Trimming with Booklet CT Incompatible Special Originals Resolution Very high Mixed Original SDF Tab Paper O Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat Stamp Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory Layout Horizontal order Vertical order Original 2in1 4in1 8in1 4in1 8in1 Crosswise type 1 2 1 3 1 2 4 1 3 7 1 2 Ss 5 Se 2 4 6 8 1 2 1 5 1 2 3 4 1 3 2 6 3 4 5 6 2 4 3 7 7 8 4 18 Application Selection Screen Combination Mode Selection Screen Combination Image Shift E Book p n MARK JApplication L Combination HORIZONTAL ORDER YERTICAL ORDER FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT AUTO Layout lal A Reverse al BEI Aitimase Image Area FrameiFold Erasure Pld i J i 9 10 Applications Applications Combination continued On ch NO Of Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Se
38. System Initial Setting Menu Screen Language Selection Screen elect one of following 1 Date amp Time setting 2 Language select setting 3 IP address setting Japanese English PREVIOUS 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 1 System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen then touch 2 Language select setting to display the Language Selection Screen Touch English Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen If no further changes are required proceed to step 7 If other system initial settings are required touch desired key Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations RO CONDO 14 8 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode System Initial Setting 1 continued IP Address Setting 8 This setting is necessary for the future use When using the Job Editor function this setting is required to enable a PC to gain access to this machine NOTE Ask your network manager to perform this setting Incorrect setting may cause a trouble in other network systems O Setting options IP address Subnetmask Gateway ad
39. 1 Face down non sort exit 2 Face up non sort exit 3 Face down group exit 4 Face up group exit Primary main tray Four output types can be specified by STAPLE SORT and SORT keys on the Basic Screen and by the setting on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen Face up exit is not available 1 Sort exit 2 Staple sort exit 3 Non sort exit 4 Group exit 1 12 Introduction Introduction Copier Features continued Optional Equipment continued Finisher FN 4 continued Booklet tray Stapled and folded or simply folded booklets are to be delivered onto this tray These two finishing modes can be specified on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen Trimming unit tray This tray is attached to a Trimming Unit option installed on the Finisher FN 4 Folded or stapled and folded trimmed booklets are delivered to this tray Cover Inserter A Used when selecting COVER SHEET on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen or when stapling copies manually Trimming Unit TMG 1 Used when selecting TRIM with STAPLING amp FOLDING or FOLDING on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen Large Capacity Cassette C 305 4 000 sheets Large Capacity Cassette C 305L 4 000 sheets 64MB Memory M64 1 128MB Memory M128 1 Printer Controller Pi7500 HDD Introduction 1 13 Section 2 Safety Information User Instructions Machine Labels Label Locations Machine Installation and Power Requirements Machine Handling
40. 65mm Select siz e CANCEL 1 4 6 0 STD size STD size special Non STD size STD size S ASW Wide paper Paper type Setting CANCEL Special Size Setting Screen Wide paper SELECT SIZE ASW FER A Sue STD size IMAGE POS STD size special am 55x85w Peige 85x11W Input size 2 STD size Non STD size 123mm x 65mm Paper type soting CANCEL OK 14 24 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Paper Type Special Size Set 6 continued 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 2 Touch 6 Paper type Special size set to display the Paper Type Setting Screen To specify paper type 1 Touch the desired paper tray key to highlight it 2 Touch the arrow keys to select paper type To specify special size 1 Touch Special size setting on the Paper Type Setting Screen to display the Special Size Setting Screen 2 Touch the desired paper tray to highlight it 3 Touch a paper size key to specify a paper size for the selected tray e Select STD size to allow the machine to automatically detect the size of paper loaded in the tray and indicate it on the tray key e Select STD size special to display the popup menu to show available paper sizes to be specified Use arrow keys on the popup menu to select the desired si
41. 7 Press 0 of the control panel keypad to start writing the adjustment data If other key operator settings are required press 1 to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 8 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password Key Operator Mode 14 37 Key Operator Mode Tray Size Setting 11 Select whether the tray size setting will be detected or not detected when ATS APS functions If you select it to be detected you may also select the priority of the detection for each tray Key Operator Mode Screen 1 p one of following ite 1 System initial setting 6 Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting 7 Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode 8 Key operator data setting ECH function setting Q weekly timer Lock delete program memory 10 Control panel adjustment Le 1 8 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 p d elect one of following ite 1 Tray size setting Side 2 lens adjustment Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment Memary switch setting HDD management setting Machine management list print PREVIOUS SCREEN Tray Auto Select Setting Screen ATSIAPS switch Tray priority High Tray Tray2 Bypass Up A Tray1 Tays Tray2 y Lec ice Down Y Tray3 T Low Bypass
42. Basic Screen Align original on EDH u Finisher Mode Selection Screen on displayed JOB 10 EXIT TRAY STAPLE 2 POS gt STAPLE lt 2POS gt OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt aa sue A AJ crouer Noo aq 7 DH Ee Ee Z 2 oy ERR RSR EE S gt 2 Ke bh Ia V II Pl ronn ES emen C ABCDE t ABCDE ABCDE A t l A A ABCDE Apcng We e l ABCDE d ABCDE oo ABODE Al ess ABCDE ABCDE wen IS mme 7 8 Output Modes Output Modes Staple
43. CT Incompatible Applications Non Ilmage Area Erase Reverse Image Frame Fold Erasure Application Selection Screen JOB 10 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Sheet Cover Transparency AUTO Eh Insertion Pe SI Se All image Chapter Image Insert Son Area 9 Z Interleave Layout H V Sa 12 DO f Combination BE Book Copy Gl a EN Repeat Wa G i Image Shift Booklet Program Eg gamp Ki 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch All image Area 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Select the desired copy size 6 Enter the desired print quantity 7 Position original s FACE UP in document handler or FACE DOWN on platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 8 Press Start After copying is completed touch All image Area on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine Applications 9 33 Applications Image Shift Use Image Shift to create a new binding margin on originals copied in the 1 1 or 2 2 mode or adjust existing margins on originals copied in the 1 2 or
44. Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting EC M function setting 9 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment f 1 ABC Corporation 2 ki 4 TEST copy 14 DEF Company 15 5 PREVIOUS zl DR SS 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 2 Touch 5 Lock delete program memory to display the Lock Delete Program Memory Screen To lock unlock a program memory 1 Touch the key on the left side of the desired job number Use arrow keys to scroll to the desired job number if required 2 The lock icon will appear on the touched key to show that the selected job is locked The previously locked job will be unlocked when selected and the lock icon on the touched key will disappear To delete a program memory 1 Touch the job number you want to delete Use arrow keys to scroll to the desired job number if required 2 Touch DELETE Selected programs and the name will be deleted from the program memory 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen 4 If other key operator settings are required touch desired key from 1 to 18 5 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOTE If an invalid Key
45. The Weekly timer function turns the copier ON and OFF once a day Use the Lunch hour off function to shut down power during the lunch break and then turn it on again according to the Weekly timer function setting Only one off time interval can be programmed Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting Timer setting Timer action ON OFF setting Function Function Yalid Invalid OFF Restart Lunch hour off setting 99 00 00 Timer interrupt password set PREVIOUS mahi 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 9 Weekly timer Enter your 4 digit Weekly timer master key code then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen See note 2 3 Touch 4 Lunch hour off setting to display the Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen 4 Touch Function Valid to activate the Lunch hour off function Set OFF time and Restart time using the touch screen keypad and then touch SET after each entry Touch Function Invalid to de activate the Lunch hour off function The time setting area will appear grayed out and cannot be selected The Function Invalid setting is the factory default setting 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen 6 If other Weekly timer settings are required select another d
46. Unless Face Up Exit is selected all simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies exit to the tray face down When Face Up Exit is selected all simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies exit face up While the Face Up Exit mode reduces the amount of paper movement you will be required to arrange pages in the correct order manually O Face up exit can be selected together with Non sort Rotation sort Group or Rotation group CT When using the platen glass with simplex 1 1 copying start copying from the last page first and continue in that reverse order to output the set in correct order CT Incompatible None CT When using the Multi sheet bypass tray the Face Up mode is automatically selected To release this setting contact your service representative Basic Screen Output Menu Screen Align original on EDH e ode OUTPUT MODE a E OUTPUT COPY MC A f FACE GROUP UP m D x ME ER ROTATION_ FACE HAT STEI GROUP DOWN el 1 gt Vv kal To Set Face Up Non Sort Exit 1 Confirm that the SORT key is not highlighted If SORT is highlighted touch SORT to deselect it 2 Touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Menu Screen 3 Touch FACE UP to highlight it 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basi
47. Combination Transparency Interleave Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat Storing image in Overlay Memory Key operator can specify the position of page numbering of Stamp 1 sidedoriginals ll 1 2 3 A 47 48 Booklet copying l t X agit S 1 3 5 7 45 7 2 sidedoriginals III Application Selection Screen Booklet Mode Selection Screen Chapter Image Insert BZ Reverse al BM acs tott binding Book Copy BENE Image Shit fE COYERS TRAY E d Booklet Fees Se b WEE No cover sheet Sete copy abbet over Tank sheet CHANGE OG yems Tray CANS Sud MODE CANCEL ok 9 12 Applications Applications Booklet continued 1 Load 11 x17 or 8 5 x11 R copy paper in a tray When selecting cover sheet mode COVER WITH COPY SHEET or COVER WITH BLANK SHEET load the same size paper in any other tray unless it is specified as Thick 2 or TAB of the paper type in the Key operator mode 2 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 3 Touch Booklet to enter the Booklet Mode Selection Screen 4 Touch NO COVER SHEET COVER WITH COPY SHEET or COVER WITH BLANK SHEET as required When a cover sheet is required touch CHANGE OF THE COVERS TRAY to select the cover sheet tray source Touch CHANGE OF THE OUTPUT MODE if you want to change the binding mode 5 Touch OK 6 Select additional copying features as desired e When using the Reduce amp shift mode or Page space function of Image shift
48. Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting If you think the buttons are not correctly aligned with the Touch Panel carry out the procedure below 1 Using a pencil LIGHTLY press the upper right and lower left crosses once each 2 Press the two CHECK buttons a buzzer sound should be heard E C M function setting 9 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment PREVIOUS SCREEN CHECK BUTTON If you do not hear a buzzer please repeat steps 1 amp 2 Previous screen T write 0 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 2 Touch 10 Control panel adjustment to display the Control Panel Adjustment Screen 3 Touch the indication at the upper right corner then lower left corner on the screen The present coordinates will be displayed in the message area of the screen 4 Check that the X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first line of the message area fall within the standard value displayed in the second line 5 Touch the CHECK BUTTONS at the upper left and lower right corners on the screen to check if the buzzer tone functions normally 6 If the coordinates fall out of the range of the standard value in step 4 or the buzzer tone does not sound in step 5 repeat the adjustment procedure from 3 to 5
49. Frameitold ff Job b s Erasure ER g Applications 9 31 Applications AUTO Layout continued 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch AUTO Layout The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity 3 Select additional copying features as desired When using EDH to scan originals touch Non image Area Erase to deselect it 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Select the desired copy size 6 Enter the desired print quantity 7 Position original s FACE UP in the document handler or FACE DOWN on the platen glass IMPORTANT DO NOT CLOSE THE DOCUMENT HANDLER WHEN USING PLATEN GLASS PLACING ORIGINAL OBLIQUELY ON THE PLATEN GLASS MAY CAUSE BLACK COPY MARKS When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 8 Press Start After copying is completed touch AUTO Layout on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 32 Applications Applications All lmage Area Use this function to make copies printed completely to the edges CT Copies will be made without image cutoff on the edges CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Rotation Sort CT Incompatible Special Originals None
50. If originals of the reserve job are already scanned when the misfeed occurs the reserve job printing can be performed after the jam is cleared and the cleared job is completed 1 Touch JAM to display the Jam Position Screen 2 To view Help Screen instructions touch GUIDE and remove paper original 3 The JAM will change to PRINT JOB or SCAN JOB 4 Press Start The print scan job will be reprocessed 5 Touch FREE JOB to continue setting the reserve job If scanning is not completed when the misfeed occurs but reserve settings has already been made the reserve job can be performed after the cleared job is completed Simply insert the original document and press Start Basic Operations 6 25 Basic Operations Reserve continued When Paper is Depleted for the Job in Progress If the paper supply for a print job in progress becomes depleted while you are setting a Reserve job the PRINT JOB key on the screen will change to ADD PAPER key blinking Basic Screen
51. K Key Operator Data Setting 14 27 Key Operator Mode 14 2 KEY OPERATOR MODE key 6 39 Key Operator Password 3 12 Key Sound Adjustment 14 26 Keypad 3 9 L Language Select Setting 14 8 Large capacity cassette 3 5 Laser Safety 2 12 Laser Safety Label 2 16 LCC top door 3 5 LCD touch screen 3 9 Lead Edge Delete 3 12 Left door 3 3 Left partition glass 15 11 Left side cover 3 3 Lengthwise type original 9 10 Lever A 3 4 Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble 16 3 Lock Delete Program Memory 14 23 Lock icon 10 3 Lunch Hour Off Setting 14 35 M Machine Labels 2 3 Machine Management List Print 14 46 Manual Low Power 5 3 Manual Shut Off 5 4 Manual staple control panel 3 5 Manual Stapling 7 18 Memory indicator 6 2 Memory Overflow 16 4 Memory Switch Setting 14 40 Mixed Original 8 8 Mode Check key 3 9 Mode key 3 9 Multi sheet bypass tray 6 42 N NO COVER SHEET key 9 13 Non Image Area Erase 9 23 Non sort mode 7 5 Non STD size key 8 12 Notice Message 3 13 O Oblique erase mode 9 23 OUTPUT APPLI key 7 9 Output icon 6 2 Overlay 9 43 Overlay Memory 9 45 Ozone Release 2 17 P PAGE NUMBERING 9 38 PAGE SPACE key 9 37 Panel Contrast 14 26 Panel Reset key 3 9 Panel Reset Key Function 14 42 Panel Reset Mode 3 11 Panel Reset Timer 14 42 Paper empty indicator 15 2 Paper indicator 15 2 PAPER TYPE SIZE key 6 18 Paper Type Special Size Set 14 24 Paper Weight Compatibility Chart 4 11 Photo Mode 8 6 P Utility key 3 9 Platen AMS
52. Key Operator Mode Copier Initial Setting 2 continued Key Operator Mode Screen Copier Initial Setting Screen System initial settini 6 Paper type Special size set y g y OUTPUT COPY MODE 4 COPY DENSITY LENS MODE PAPER SIZE FUNCTION USER USERI SR tial sett 7 al H opier initial setting LX Paret contrast Key sound adj Al alse A Dos 85x11 4 User setting mode 8 Key operator data setting oe Sri NORMAI ZOOM g 85x14 _ ep SI 5x ECH function setting 9 weekly timer STAPLE EIS v RE WISS ROTATION Lock delete program memory 10 Control panel adjustment SORT To AES 1 1 APS PREYIOUS J cancer 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 2 Copier initial setting to display the Copier Initial Setting Screen 3 Make a selection for each mode as initial settings Touch EDH to select or deselect it Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen If no further changes are required proceed to step 7 If other key operator settings are required touch desired key Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOOA Key Operator Mode 14 11 Key Operator Mode User Setting Mode 3 Set
53. MARK f Application L Transparency FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Interl ave Transparency Non image m AUTO TRANSPARENCY INTERLEAYE Reverse All image image Alz Area Book Copy BS A Image Shift Frame Fold Stamp rasure Bo Overlay ti Blank sheet Copy sheet Interleaving interleaving 5 S i hp o OO OND Load copy paper in tray 1 2 3 or 4 to match the size of transparencies Open the Multi sheet bypass tray Insert one transparency at a time into the Multi sheet bypass tray and adjust the paper guides IMPORTANT DO NOT LOAD TRANSPARENCIES INTO ANY OTHER TRAY Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen Touch Transparency Interleave to display the Transparency Interleave Screen Touch Blank sheet Interleaving or Copy sheet Interleaving unless it is already highlighted Touch OK Make additional Application selections or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen Print quantity is already set to 1 Not available to enter any other number Place original FACE UP in the document handler or FACE DOWN on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make the Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen
54. Never touch internal high voltage area indicated with a WARNING label Never touch the drum surface Never put your hand into the developing unit when removing mishandled paper A CAUTION FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN MACHINE DAMAGE OVERHEATING AND OR PERSONAL INJURY MACHINE CONTACT Never touch internal high temperature or magnetism areas indicated with a CAUTION label Never insert your hand into the fixing unit when removing mishandled paper Never touch the inside of the main body for any purpose except removing mishandled paper or adding toner Use care when drawing out the conveyance fixing unit O MACHINE CARE Do not drop paper clips staples and other small metallic objects into the copier or spill water or any other liquid into the machine DN Do not use the machine surface to support vases books etc These items will interfere with the work space and may cause damage to the machine or to original documents g ABNORMAL CONDITIONS If any abnormal sound odor or smoke generates from the machine immediately stop using the copier turn off the main power switch disconnect the plug and contact your service representative Or If a circuit breaker is tripped or if a fuse blows stop using the machine and contact an electrician If more detailed information is needed regarding the power source or power consumption of this machine contact your service representative
55. Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment PREVIOUS SCREEN Buzzer volume regulation Backlight contrast adjustment CV smn HA me CV ene HA large 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 2 Touch 7 Panel contrast Key sound adj to display the Panel Contrast Key Sound Adjustment Screen 3 Adjust the Panel contrast Backlight contrast or Buzzer volume as desired Touch Dimmer to make the panel or backlight contrast dimmer than currently displayed or touch Brighter to make the panel or backlight contrast brighter than currently displayed Touch Small or Big to regulate the buzzer volume of the touch keys Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required touch desired key from 1 to 18 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations OO P NOTES 1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid A doit password 2 The control panel contrast feature can be adjusted from the Help screen provided the feature setting is activated by Service When the Control panel contrast key is pressed the Contrast adjustment screen will be displayed Contact your service representative if the
56. key 85x11 a yaw ERE ORMA zoom 85M we H Application key 8 5x11 STAPLE mba e RE 2 11x17 E ROTATION e Rotation Off key ES EEB EE store Store key i T T Output Mode keys Basic Mode keys NOTE The original count displayed in the center of the message area counts the original pages placed in the document handler as they are scanned A duplex original as well as a simplex original counts 1 When scanning from the platen glass the counter increases by 1 for every image scanned The popup menu appears on the Basic Screen to select the basic copying conditions NOTE During the process of successive copying jobs the message Warming up may be displayed in the message area of the Basic Screen to maintain the copy image quality 6 2 Basic Operations Basic Operations How to Make a Basic Copy continued The Basic Screen continued 1 Position the original document in the document handler or on the platen glass 2 Press Start to start
57. 11 2 Document cover 15 11 Drum unit 3 4 E ECM Electronic Copy Monitor 14 15 ECM management list 14 46 ECM master key code 3 12 ECM password 5 5 EDH Electronic Document Handler 3 3 EDH AMS 14 43 EDH APS 14 43 EDH frame erasure selection 14 42 EDH Store Mode 6 29 Energy Saver ON OFF key 3 9 Energy Saver Mode 5 2 Energy Saver Setting 14 39 Erasure outside area of original 14 42 EXCEEDS LIMIT message 16 9 F Face Down Exit 7 21 Face Up Exit 7 24 FCC Regulations 2 12 Finisher Adjustment 14 48 Finisher Paper Capacity 2 10 Fixing part 3 4 FN 104 FN 4 Finisher 3 5 Folder keys 6 2 Folding mode 7 13 Font pattern list 14 46 Frame Fold Erasure 9 29 FREE JOB key 6 21 Front Back Cover Full Scan mode 9 19 FRONT BLANK key 9 6 2 Index Index FRONT COPY key 9 6 Front Cover Full Scan mode 9 19 Front Cover Mode 9 4 Front door 3 3 Full Scan mode 9 19 G GROUP key 7 10 7 12 H HDD 11 2 HDD Management Setting 14 49 HDD STORE key 11 7 Help key 6 39 HELP MENU key 6 40 Help Mode 6 39 High Mode 8 3 l ICES Regulations 2 12 Image Insert 9 17 Image Recall Mode 11 9 Image Shift 9 34 Image Store amp Output Mode 11 7 Image Store Delete Mode 11 3 Increase Contrast Mode 8 6 Initial Settings 3 11 Insertion Mode 9 4 Internal Laser Radiation 2 13 Interrupt key 6 37 Interrupt Mode 6 37 IP Address Setting 14 9 J JAM key 6 25 JOB CLEAR key 6 24 JOB PRIORITY key 6 24 Job Recall 10 4 JOB STOP key 16 4 Job Store 10 2
58. 14 43 Index 3 Index Platen APS 14 42 Platen glass 4 2 Platen Store Mode 6 27 PM CALL message 3 13 PM counter 15 10 Power OFF ON Screen 16 5 Power switch 3 3 Preset and User Set Ratios 6 14 Preventive Maintenance PM 15 10 PREVIOUS JOB LIST key 6 24 Primary main tray 3 5 Printer counter 5 8 Program Job 9 21 Program Memory key 10 2 Program memory list 14 46 Proof Copy 6 34 Proof Copy key 3 9 6 34 R RE key 6 14 Rectangular erase mode 9 23 Reduce amp Shift 9 34 RELEASE SETTING key 6 36 Repeat Image 9 26 Reserve mode 6 21 Resolution 8 3 Reverse Image 9 25 Right side door 3 3 Rotation 6 30 ROTATION GROUP key 7 23 7 26 ROTATION OFF key 6 2 S SCAN JOB key 6 22 SCAN STOP key 16 4 SDF Single Document Feed 8 11 Secondary sub tray 3 5 Server Function 11 2 Service Settings 3 12 SET NUMBERING 9 38 Sheet Cover Insertion 9 3 Shortcuts 13 2 Side 2 Lens Adjustment 14 47 SORT key 7 6 SPECIAL ORIGINAL key 8 2 Special Ratio Table 6 12 Stamp 9 38 Staple cartridge 15 8 Staple Mode Selection button 7 19 Staple position icon 7 8 Staple Sheet Capacity 3 13 STAPLE SORT key 7 8 Staple Start Stop button 7 19 Stapling amp Folding mode 7 13 Start key 3 9 STATUS key 6 23 Stop key 3 9 STORE key 6 27 Store Mode 6 27 SUB TRAY key 7 12 Summer time key 14 7 System Initial Setting 14 7 T Tab Paper 8 12 Tandem icon 6 2 TANDEM key 12 3 Text Mode 8 6 Timer indicator 3 9 Timer Interrupt 5 6 Timer In
59. 445mm Min 3 94 x5 83 100mm x 148mm Specified Size Automatically 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R A3 B4 A4 B5 B5R Specified Size Manually STD Size Special F4 A4R A5 A5R Specified Size Manually Wide Paper 11 x17 W 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 WR 5 5 x8 5 W 5 5 x8 5 WR A3W B4W A4W A4WR BSW B5WR A5W A5WR Paper Weight 16 45 Ib duplex 1 2 and 2 2 copy mode Special OHP transparencies labels hole punch rag content Multi Sheet Bypass Tray Capacity 150 sheets 20 Ib stacked single feed special stock NOTE Reliability and copy quality are not guaranteed for all Special papers Use only paper that is recommended by us 4 8 Paper Information Paper Information Paper in FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Option In Bin Stapler Finisher FN 104 FN 4 accepts LEDGER 11 x17 LEGAL 8 5 x14 and LETTER R 8 5 x11 R standard wide paper sizes 5 5 x8 5 R W in Non sort Sort or Group mode FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Primary Main Tray Finisher FN 104 FN 4 capacities at 20Ib unless otherwise indicated Non sort Sort Group mode 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 W 5 5 x8 5 R 5 5 x8 5 WR A5 A5W A5R A5WR 3 000 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 WR A4 A4W A4R A4WR B5 B5W B5R B5WR 1 500 sheets 11 x17 11 x17 W 8 5 x14 A3 A3W B4 B4W Staple sort mode 1 000 sheets 11 x17 11 x17 W 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 WR NOTE Variable according to the number of pages
60. 650mm Depth 25 8 in 656mm Height 43 1 in 1095mm Cover Inserter A Width 13 0 in 330mm Depth 18 0 in 456mm Height 4 7 in 120mm Trimming Unit TMG 1 Width 44 0 in 1117mm Depth 23 8 in 604mm Height 22 1 in 662mm Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice 17 4 Machine Specifications Specifications Automatic Duplex Unit ADU Finisher FN 104 FN 4 Staple Cartridge Cover Inserter A Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Paper weight 16 45 Ib Paper curl limit 20 mm or less Non stack type Modes 1 gt 2 2 gt 2 Power source Main body Non sort Sort Group mode 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 R 3000 sheets 8 5 x11 R 1500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 Size 11 x17 5 5 x8 5 R Staple sort mode 1000 sheets Size 11 x17 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 Variable according to the number of pages to be stapled See p 4 7 or p 4 8 for detail Folding Stapling amp Folding mode FN 4 only 100 sheets Size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm The maximum number of sheets varies depending on the number of pages in the booklet and whether Folding or Stapling amp Folding is selected See p 4 10 5000 staples cartridge Power source Finisher Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x11 5 5 x11 R A4 A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm Paper weight in cover sheet mode 13 110 Ib 200g m thick paper Paper weight in
61. 7 Sat Sun SET PREVIOUS Collectively Weekly Timer On Off Time Collective Setting Screen 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting Timer setting Timer action ON OFF setting Lunch hour off setting Timer interrupt password set ech Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 9 Weekly timer Enter your 4 digit Weekly timer master key code then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen See note 2 NOTES 1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit code 3 Touch 2 Timer setting to display the Weekly Timer On Off Time Setting Screen 4 When the screen is displayed the ON time of Monday is always highlighted Enter a 2 digit ON hour ex 8 a m is 08 and a 2 digit ON minute ex 7 min is 07 using the touch screen keypad and then touch SET Touching SET repeatedly will shift the input section from Monday ON Monday OFF Tuesday ON Tuesday OFF e g NOTES e If ON time and OFF time are the same power will not go on e If the setting is 00 00 00 00 you will not be able to set the copiers off on condition for specific days When setting Sunday OFF time Monday ON time is highlighted again Proceed to step 6 Key Opera
62. 8 Paper in FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Option ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesecaeeeneenees 4 9 FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Primary Main Tray eeceecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 4 9 FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Secondary Sub Tray cccsseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesetaeeeeee 4 9 FN 4 Finisher Booklet Tray ccccccesscccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseseeeseeeesssnnseeeeeenennaaees 4 10 Paper in Cover Inserter A Option 4 10 Gover Insener A eebe geeggierfe gedet a e ennaa aa aaa aae aa EES eels anaa aasa 4 10 Paper in Trimming Unit TMG 1 Option 4 11 Paper Weight Compatibility Chart cccccecescceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaaeesecaeeeseaaeeessaeeeeeaes 4 11 Contents Section 5 Copier Management Energy Saver Mode TE 5 2 e Wee 5 2 Manual LOW POW EE 5 3 AUTO SIUTZOR ET 5 4 EIERE UE ET 5 4 Entering an ECM Password 5 5 Weekly Timer Function rriro aaran eare EAO ALTTA PERLA aE PEENTE AEE AATAS 5 6 TIMET ul ue TE 5 6 Kater Lebens etc en Sun ege Eege SEENEN 5 8 To Display Counter List 0 cccccceceeeeeeeeee cece eeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaaeeeseeeeesaeeeeeaes 5 8 TLO Print GOUNTEM LISTE ire arnesa Eege NEES EE EEN EA 5 8 Section 6 Basic Operations How to Make a Basic Copy 6 2 RV 6 2 Ree TEE 6 4 Copy Mode Using EDH ssssssssssessseesssssirssirrssinsstnrsnnssttrsstnrsssrnnstnnntunntnnsnnnnnsnnnt 6 5 12 Copy Mode Using Platen Glass 6 6 Gopy Density eege ea eld ae eae ed
63. Counter List Screen if desired Control Panel Counter List Screen G Gi 3 Serial Number 12345678 O ART DA 6 Total counter 12345678 2000 12 01 Counter list 7 2 Copier counter 12345678 EEN Printer counter 12345678 Utility To Display the Counter List 1 Press P Utility to display the Counter List Screen 2 Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen To Print the Counter List 1 Press P Utility to display the Counter List Screen 2 Touch Counter list output The Basic Screen will be displayed 3 Touch the desired tray key to select the copy size NOTE Do not touch APS or the Management list print mode will be released 4 Press Start The counter list will be printed out and the Management list mode will be released 5 8 Copier Management Section 6 Basic Operations How to Make a Basic Copy The Basic Screen Copy Mode Copy Mode Using EDH 12 Copy Mode Using Platen Glass Copy Density Automatic Exposure Selection AES Manual Mode Lighter Normal Darker Density Shift Lens Mode Automatic Paper Selection APS Automatic Magnification Selection AMS Special Ratio Table Selecting a Special Ratio for Non Standard Paper Preset and User Set Ratios Zoom Mode Vertical Horizontal Zoom Copy Size Programming Copy Size for UNIV Key Selecting Paper Type Size for Multi sheet Bypass Tray Reserve Set Reserve Job Job Status Screen Mishandled Paper During
64. EDH in 1 2 or 2 2 mode for the purpose of locating title pages on the right side rather than reverse side of a duplex copy To effectively locate the title page on the right a blank sheet will be automatically created on the reverse side of a sheet if required Title pages Max 30 from 1 999 Copy mode 1 2 mode is automatically selected 2 2 mode can be selected Use document handler EDH Store mode is also available in this case use platen glass or EDH Use STAMP together with this function to print chapter number onto chapter page in addition to page number numbering or watermark numbering See p 9 38 to p 9 42 Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions 1 1 2 1 Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Face Up Incompatible Special Originals Resolution High Very high Mixed Original SDF Tab Paper Incompatible Applications Combination Transparency Interleave Image Insert Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat Storing image in Overlay Memory OO OF OF OOO 1 sided originals Copies in Chapter mode 2 sided originals Tilte page Title pages gt H Yr Sa 8 H 5 1 f 4 4 2 3 q Haye any Title pages Title page Application Selection Screen Chapter Insertion Setting No Screen BOOK 208 10 MARK Jf Application L Chapter PA
65. Entry Screen Overlaying Image Selection Screen Image Name Entry Screen BOOK OR MARK Jf Application L Stamp Overlay Get MARK f Application L Stamp Overlay G H 1 J ABCDI111 19 03 ABCD1111 1999 11 03 ABCDI111 1999 11 03 ABCD2222 1999 11 17 ABCD2222 1999 11 17 ABCD2222 1999 11 17 a R S T EFGH3333 1999 11 19 EFGH3333 1999 11 19 EFGH3333 1999 11 19 F P IMAGEOO1 rd 5 ABCD2222 1999 11 17 ABCD2222 1999 11 17 ABCD2222 1999 11 17 2 sf 7f sis 1 CHARACTER DELETE EFGH3333 1999 11 19 EFGH3333 1999 11 19 EFGH3333 1999 11 19 ary Cx 5 Enter the desired image name in up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad The date when you made this entry will also be stored automatically To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct image name 6 If the image name is correct touch OK The Basic Screen to store the overlaying image will be displayed If the popup menu with YES and NO keys is displayed instead of the Basic Screen the entered name is duplicated Touch YES to enter a new name or NO to create a duplicate name If the popup menu with OK key is displayed the entered name is duplicated Touch OK then enter a new name If the IMAGE DELETE key is displayed on the Overlay Image Selection Screen you can delete the stored image and name Select the image name using up down arrow key to scroll then touch IMAGE DELETE NOTE Changing the popup menu
66. Folded Original 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Make other compatible selections 6 Position Z folded original s in the document handler NOTE Normal originals can also be loaded at the same time 7 Press Start After copying is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 8 10 Special Original Special Original Special Original continued SDF Single Document Feed Use the SDF mode to copy thick originals to be fed one sheet at a time in the document feeder CT Use EDH CT EDH capacity 1 sheet at a time CT Key operator can set the machine to automatically feed the original one second after placing the original in the document handler Auto Start when the SDF mode is used together with Store mode If the original has already been placed in the document handler before selecting the SDF mode the Auto Start will not function In this case touch STORE then press Start to scan CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Using platen glass Staple Sort Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group CT Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Z Folded Original WHOLE AREA in Non STD Size CT Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Image Insert Non Ilmage Area Erase Repeat except 2 4 8 Repeat Auto Layout Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory Special Original Sc
67. In the blank mode a blank interleaf sheet is output with each transparency to keep the film material from sticking together In the copy mode a copied interleaf sheet is output with each transparency to provide reference during a presentation a medium for photocopying and a set for filing or inserting into a binder OO O0OOOUOUOUON AMS is automatically selected Transparency source Multi sheet bypass tray Multi sheet bypass tray capacity 1 transparency sheet Transparency size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 Interleaving paper source Tray 1 2 3 or 4 Interleaving paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 Number of originals number of copies 1 Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions APS 1 2 2 2 Staple Sort Sort Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Folding Stapling amp Folding Trimming Using Cover Inserter Tandem Mode Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Tab Paper Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Image Insert Program Job Repeat Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE rb ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE BCDE Original Blank sheet Interleaving Copy sheet Interleaving Applications 9 15 Applications Transparency Interleave continued Application Selection Screen Transparency Interleave Screen BOOK 0610
68. Menu Screen 5 To exit the Key Operator mode touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Key Operator Mode Screen to restore the Basic Screen NOTES 1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid A doit password 2 If an invalid ECM master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 8 digit code The ECM master key code can be set to less than 8 digits by the Memory switch setting of the Key operator function 14 16 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 continued E C M Data Edit 1 Use this setting to display the list of copy count and copy limit for each account to change add or delete the ECM data and to reset the copy count of the individual account O ECM No Designated by key operator ECM Password Unique 8 digit numeric code programmed by key operator for user O User Name Max 8 characters CT Copy Limit 0 to 999 999 copies ECM Setting Menu Screen ECM Data Edit Screen 1 ECM data edit E C M all count reset E C M function setting NO NAME COUNTILIMIT 0005 ABCDEF 000001 99999c Change 1000 2KC5G 012345 999999 A Add Delete SET PREVIOUS COUNT PREVIOUS SCREEN RESET SCREEN ECM Data Change Screen ECM Data Add Screen
69. New Staple Cartridge into FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Use only the staples supplied by us Contact your service representative to reorder a VE Yh ae N NAA Ye S S E 1 Open the Finisher door 2 Pull out the stacker unit by holding the stacker unit handle 3 Pull up the cartridge housing then remove it while sliding it along the stapler rail 4 Remove the empty cartridge from the cartridge housing 5 Insert the new cartridge into the housing NOTE Do not remove the staples remaining inside the housing otherwise the first sheet output after the replenishment will not be stapled 6 Insert the cartridge housing while sliding it along the stapler rail then push in and down to secure it in place 7 Return the stacker unit to its original position 8 Close the Finisher door 15 8 Maintenance amp Supplies Maintenance amp Supplies Empty Trash Basket of TMG 1 Trimming Unit When the trash basket becomes full Trash basket of Trimmer is full Please empty trash basket message displays on the touch screen 1 Open the trimmer front door Withdraw the trash basket 2 Empty the trash basket 3 Return the trash basket to its original position then close the trimmer front door securely Maintenance amp Supplies 15 9 Maintenance amp Supplies Preventive Maintenance After a set number of copies have been made on
70. ON OFF Setting Specify the working days of the machine by the Timer for all Mondays through Sundays and or individually for each day of the given month 4 Lunch hour off setting Specify the lunch time interval during which the copier will go off and on 5 Timer interrupt password set Require Password entry for the Timer off function and establish the amount of usage time NOTES 1 The time is set in terms of the 24 hour clock where hour 1 is the first hour after midnight and hour 24 is the hour of midnight For example 6 a m is 06 00 hours 6 p m is 18 00 hours 2 The Panel Reset key is used to change numbers determined by the SET touch key 14 28 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode Key Operator Mode Screen Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen af 1 System initial setting Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting E C M function setting Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment PREVIOUS SCREEN Weekly timer password 4 ok KOK CANCEL Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting Timer setting Timer action ON OFF setting Lunch hour off setting Timer interrupt password set PREVIOUS SCREEN Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode
71. Operator Mode Screen 6 If other key operator settings are required touch desired key from 1 to 18 7 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password Key Operator Mode 14 27 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 This function can be accessed only by the key operator after a unique 4 digit Weekly timer master key code is entered The Weekly Timer is a copier management function that shuts down power to the machine on a daily or hourly basis and can be programmed specifically for lunch breaks weekends and holidays or any time the copier is not required In Addition Timer Interrupt can be enabled with or without a password requirement to allow temporary use of the machine during periods when power is shut down by the Timer function Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer e The power plug is inserted into the socket e The power switch is turned on e The current date and time are correctly set If the Weekly timer needs to be activated on your machine contact your service representative The following Weekly timer settings can be made 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting Enable and disable the Timer function 2 Timer Setting Specify the times that the copier will turn ON and OFF for each day of the week or the entire week 3 Timer action
72. Paper Information Using the Electronic Document Handler EDH continued Positioning an SDF Original In the SDF mode one thick original can be fed through the EDH tray 0 0 g g g g g Original size 11 x17 to 5 5 x8 5 Original weight 13 lb 34 Ib 2 1 and 2 2 copying 13 Ib 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper 1 1 and 1 2 copying Max number of original 1 sheet at a time Print quantity Max 9 999 sheets Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Using platen glass Staple Sort Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Z Folded Original WHOLE AREA in Non STD Size Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Image Insert Non lmage Area Erase Repeat except 2 4 8 Repeat AUTO Layout Overlay 1 Close the EDH 2 Select the SDF mode See p 8 11 3 Position an original FACE UP on the EDH tray 4 Adjust paper guides Paper Information 4 5 Paper Information Using the Electronic Document Handler EDH continued Positioning Mixed Originals Mixed size originals can be copied together from the document handler in either APS mode or AMS mode In APS mode copies will be output on mixed paper sizes to match the originals In AMS mode copies will be output on one common paper size that you select in which case an appropriate AMS magnification ratio will be selected automatically To use the mixed original mode see procedure on p
73. Preset ratios shown below can be adjusted in the Key Operator mode In addition three User Set ratios are adjustable by the key operator All ratios remain effective until they are replaced 8 Preset ratios 0 50 0 65 0 77 0 93 1 21 1 29 1 55 and 2 00 O 3 User Set ratios Programmable by key operator and selected from 0 33 4 00 CT To copy 5 5 x8 5 originals to 5 5 x8 5 copy paper select 5 5 x8 5 Copy Size then select 1 00 magnification Basic Screen with the popup menu for preset ratio setting STATUS LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION ENLARGE Det PRESET 1 PRESET 25 PRESET 3 PRI 2 00 155 129 121 SPECIAL ORIGINA APPLI 1 aus J m E 8 511 REDUCE J zoom 85x14 PRESET S PRESET G PRESET 7 PRESET 8 8 5x11 E 093 077 065 0 50 ROTATION E 4 PRESET 4 00 2 00 O50 STORE 1 Touch RE to display the popup menu for selecting the desired preset userset ratio 2 Select the desired magnification The selected key is highlighted and the popup menu goes out automatically and then the selected ratio will be displayed on the Basic Scre
74. Repeat 9 27 4 in 1 key 9 10 4 Repeat 9 27 600 Dpi 8 5 8 in 1 key 9 10 8 Repeat 9 27 90 Rotation 6 30 A ADD PAPER key 6 26 ADD TONER message 3 13 ADJUSTMENT MODE message 6 3 AES key 6 7 All Image Area 9 33 Allocation recovery mode 12 6 AMS key 6 17 APPLI key 9 2 APS key 6 17 AUTO Layout 9 31 Auto Low Power 5 2 Auto Shut Off 5 4 Automatic Exposure Selection AES 6 7 Automatic Magnification Selection AMS 6 11 Automatic Paper Selection APS 6 10 Automatic Tray Switching ATS 3 11 B BACK BLANK key 9 6 BACK COPY key 9 6 Back Cover Mode 9 4 Basic Screen 6 2 BLANK INSERTION key 9 6 Blank sheet interleaving 9 16 Book Copy 9 19 Booklet 9 12 Booklet mode outlet 3 5 Booklet tray 3 5 BYPASS key 6 19 c C key 3 9 Call for Service 16 2 CAUTION 2 2 CHANGE SETTING key 6 36 Chapter 9 8 Check Mode 6 34 Clearing Mishandled Paper 16 6 Combination 9 10 CONTINUE key 16 4 Control panel 3 3 Control Panel Adjustment 14 37 Control panel contrast key 6 39 Conveyance Fixing unit 3 4 Copier counter 5 8 Copier Initial Setting 14 10 Copying Hints 16 8 COPY INSERTION key 9 6 Copy Mode 6 4 Copy sheet interleaving 9 16 Copy Size 6 17 Counter List 5 8 Counter list output key 5 8 Count Set indicator 6 2 Cover Inserter 7 16 COVER SHEET key 7 17 COVER WITH BLANK SHEET key 9 13 COVER WITH COPY SHEET key 9 13 Crosswise type original 9 10 D DANGER 2 2 Date amp Time Setting 14 7 DATE TIME 9 38 Density Shift 6 8 DIMM
75. Reverse Image Repeat AUTO Layout Image Shift Stamp Overlay Control Panel Scanner Server Setting Menu Screen pee TETIT Ave Is one o d O q ode 7 Ge We erver SCANNER SERVER O Printer Sale GL Mode Check Help IMAGE IMAGE smu STORE DELETE RECALL Program Memory 4 Panel Reset Server Function 11 3 Server Function Image Store Delete Mode continued To Store Image Data in HDD continued Scanner Server Setting Menu Screen Image Data Password Entry Screen e of follo g SCANNER SERYER HA IMAGE IMAGE Image store password 8 D N x 3 STOREIDELETE RECALL Job Name Entry Screen Scanner Setting Screen e D ABCD JOB NAME DATE D SCANNER ABa N OUTPUT COPY MODE COPY DENSITY LENS MODE COPY Size FUNCTION registere s ed B100 x A A SPECIAL 3 ORIGINAL KIM NORMAL ZOOM APPLICATION APB There is no JOB KH u v D 1 2 1 CHARACTER DELETE RE Y paBGNOHD SCREEN we E STORE 1 Press Mode to light up the Scanner Server LED The Scanner Server Setting Menu Screen will be displayed 2 Touch IMAGE STORE DELETE The Image Data Password Entry Screen will be displayed 3 Enter the desired image data password in up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct password 4 If the password is correct
76. SIZE AMS TABLE 44 17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R A4 14177 1 00 ISCH HERMES 8 514 II 400 0 77 1 00 1 00 1 55 0 73 oon 85 x11 0 50 oe 0 77 1 00 wu B simm 0 65 0 79 1 numm 129 nz 9 94 N D 8 5 x11 R 0 77 1 00 0 73 gt kaal DD 079 roo 1 99 129 129 0 94 O 5585 033 039 oes 050 499 0 65 0 67 55 x85 W 0 50 0 61 H 0 65 1 00 0 47 sses 050 061 050 oes oes 1 00 047 5 5 x8 5 WR 0 33 0 39 0 65 0 65 0 64 049 059 097 0 75 1 38 097 1 00 A4IAAW wee 0 84 0 75 0 97 1 38 4 71 _ Rotation functions Basic Operations 6 11 Basic Operations Lens Mode continued Special Ratio Table COPY SIZE 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ORIGINAL SIZE 6 12 Basic Operations Basic Operations Lens Mode continued Selecting a Special Ratio for Non Standard Paper To determine reduction or enlargement ratios when using non standard paper sizes refer to the Special Ratio Table on the previous page and follow the procedure below ORIGINAL COPY WIDTH FIRST LOCATE THE ORIGINAL WIDTH ON THE HORIZONTAL AXIS THEN LOCATE THE COPY WIDTH ON THE VERTICAL AXIS FIND THE RATIO ON THE TABLE WHERE THESE TWO VALUES MEET ORIGINAL COPY LENGTH FIRST LOCATE THE ORIGINAL LENGTH ON THE HORIZONTAL AXIS THEN LOCATE THE COPY LENGTH ON T
77. See p 6 34 to p 6 36 10 Press Start After copying is completed touch Transparency Interleave on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 16 Applications Applications Image Insert Use the Image insert mode to combine images scanned from the platen glass such as photos paste ups newspaper articles graphs etc with images scanned from the document handler Then output the combined images as a finished set The selected copy paper size is determined by the size of originals loaded in the document handler CT All images are stored in memory CT Max image insert 30 locations CT Original Copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group CT Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Resolution Very high SDF Tab Paper CT Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Transparency Interleave Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory Place originals fa
78. Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray Use this mode when you want to offset and staple each copied set Stapling position and number of staples 1 or 2 can be designated on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen Each finished set will be offset from the next copied set With the Primary main tray initially selected on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen FN 104 FN 4 outputs the printed sheets FACE DOWN in the proper order CT Stapled paper at 1 position 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 is available in crosswise orientation only CT Stapled paper at 2 positions only 8 5 x11 paper loaded with larger dimension vertical 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 paper loaded with larger dimension horizontal O Paper capacity for 20 lb 1 000 sheets Variable according to the number of pages to be stapled See p 4 9 for details CT Staple capacity 50 sheets 20 Ib 5 0mm thick or less Staple capacity is changeable and may be set to 45 40 or 35 by service CT Staple position 1 oblique staple 1 parallel staple 2 parallel staples Basic Screen as ds 1 Eu a A La H i CZ 1 4 1 oblique staple 1 parallel staple 2 parallel staples Output Modes 7 7 Output Modes Staple Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray continued 1 Touch STAPLE SORT on the Basic Screen to highlight it The Staple Position icon will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area When not changing the staple position proceed to step 5
79. Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray continued 2 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Finisher Mode Selection Screen 3 Touch the desired key among the eight keys on the screen to select the staple position 4 Touch OK on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen The selection made in stapling position will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area 5 Select additional copying features as required 6 Enter the desired print quantity 7 Position originals in the document handler When using Store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 29 8 Press Start AA CAUTION When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected remove the copied sets while the paper is exiting otherwise mishandled paper will occur Output Modes 7 9 Output Modes Group Mode Using Primary Main Tray Use this mode when you want to group together multiple copies of each original and offset the sets upon exit Grouped sets cannot be stapled O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 paper is available in landscape type feeding only O Paper capacity for 20 Ib 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 3 000 sheets 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 1 500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 Basic Screen 3 3 5 2 1 1 ao Basic Screen Finisher Mode Selection Screen Align original on EDH u Select
80. WAITING Warming up in each mode SCANNING Scanning original s in copy mode INTERRUPT Interrupting the previous job ERROR Error in each mode PRINTING Printing in each mode NO PAPER No paper in copy print mode STOP Stop in each mode NEXT PRINT Waiting for the completion of the previous operation in copy print mode INITIALIZING Initializing for controller READY TO RESERVE Ready to reserve RECEIVING Receiving the data for controller Displays the number of scanned pages for each job 0 to 9999 Basic Operations 6 23 Basic Operations Reserve continued Job Status Screen continued PAGE s LEFT Displays the remaining copy count of the job 0 to 9999 The number exceeding 9999 will be displayed as 99991 Copy count No of scanned pages x Print quantity MINUTE s TO GO Displays the time in minutes required for completing the job Exceeding 99 minutes 99T Shorter than 1 minute lt 1 Other The following message will be displayed on the second bar when the reserved job does not exist RESERVED JOB DOES NOT EXIST TANDEM CONNECTED INFORMATION Displays the tray information and current status of the other machine when two copiers are connected and operate in tandem mode Information Paper size loaded in each tray Paper out indicator when depleted in the tray Current status OPERATING STOP NO PAPER JAM ERROR To change the order of reserve job 1 Touch the desired reserve job key to
81. amp Shift p 9 34 1 2 3 4 5 nk OO OO ON 12 First select a copy mode 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 and a copy size from the Basic screen Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch Image Shift to display the Image shift selection screen Touch Image Shift or Reduce amp Shift if image loss is likely Touch FRONT BACK or BOTH SIDES to indicate the side s on which you want the shift to occur When Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been selected the PAGE SPACE setting is available Touch UP SHIFT DOWN SHIFT RIGHT SHIFT or LEFT SHIFT to specify the shift direction Use the touch screen keypad to enter the shift amount from 0 250 mm Touch OK to return to the Application selection screen Make additional copying selections or touch OK to return to the Basic screen Enter the print quantity amount Position original s face up on the EDH document handler tray or face down on the platen glass Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine 13 8 Shortcuts Shortcuts Stamp Overlay p 9 38 1 2 3 CONDO 10 Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch Stamp Overlay to display the Stamp Overlay selection screen Touch the desired stamp STAMP SET NUMBERING PAGE NUMBERING DATE TIME WATERMARK and WATERMARK NUMBERING to display the subsequent screen On each screen you can specify the desired stamp type o
82. any questions which may arise Contents Section 1 Introduction Re Kn 1 2 Key Operator Functions c cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaaaeeseaeeeseaaeeseaeeessaaeeesecaeeneeaeees 1 2 Copier Service Repairs A Supplies cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeestaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 1 2 Machine EE EE 1 2 Control Panel with Interactive Touch Screen 0 cccccceeceseeeeeeceeseecaeeeteneeeeeeaeees 1 2 Overview of the Operator s Manual 1 3 elle gll EE 1 3 PrOGUCt OVEVIOW TEE 1 4 Features of the Di750 E 1 5 Copier FOAtUKOS aise fas iaeaea anaa va geed aea Aiah taa aake ha didaa enp Aaaa REEE 1 11 Elie E Tt Re le EE 1 11 Optional Equipment s sseseeesseeeeseesenessrnssernstsnrntnnnsttnnstnesnstnnstnnstnnnennnnnnnnsnnennnnns 1 11 Section 2 Safety Information Usar INSIUCTIONS ere r E GEESS 2 2 Macnne Labeli orr E A AE E E A 2 3 ER e e EE 2 3 Machine Installation and Power Requirement 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 2 6 Machine Handling and Care ccccccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeaaeesecaeeeeeeeeeesaaaeeeseeeeesesaeeseeaes 2 8 Routine Safety EE 2 9 Finisher Capacity Requirements 0 ccccccceceeeeceeeeneeeceeeeeseneeeeeaaaeseeneeeeeeaeeetseeeeeees 2 10 Regulations Neue GONNER ee ee eee eae eee ef Cee ee eee EONA ee 2 12 FEC REQUIAations siini eset staan ee dai AE deni ee E 2 12 IGES REQUIALIONS sitive ce ege ege ZENNER NEESS AEAN ee S idi 2 12 Laser Salety suvii scia tiie at
83. at a time to the platen glass for copying Work table provides a convenient workspace for documents both before and after copying Multi sheet bypass tray used for small quantity copying onto plain paper or special paper LCC top door opens to allow loading paper Tray 4 Large capacity cassette C 305 C 305L option holds 4 000 sheets LCC left side door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper Right side door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper Tray 3 universal tray is user adjustable and holds 1 000 sheets of either 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R or 5 5 x8 5 Tray 2 universal tray is user adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R or 5 5 x8 5 Tray 1 universal tray is user adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R or 5 5 x8 5 NOTE Tray 1 2 3 and 4 are available for loading wide types of the regular sizes specified above 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Left door opens together with the front door to allow removal of mishandled paper Front door opens to the internal copier to allow clearing of mishandled paper and replenishing of toner Left side cover opens to allow removal of mishandled paper Power switch turns copier power On Off when pressed TMG 1 Trimming unit option trims the end of booklet Trimmer stacker cover opens to allow you to take out the finished sets FN 104 FN 4 Finisher option sorts staple sorts and groups into finis
84. booklet automatically and delivers it to the Trimming unit tray e Stapling amp Folding 2 staples in the center Folding Booklet tray or Stapling amp Folding and Trimming 2 staples in the center Folding Trimming Trimming unit tray e 1 oblique staple Primary main tray e 2 parallel staples Primary main tray Specifications for Manual Stapling amp Folding mode O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A4 A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm O Paper weight 16 24 Ib 20 lb paper is recommended CT Staple capacity 16 sheets max 20 lb paper 15 sheets max 20 lb paper with a thick paper cover CT Output tray Booklet tray Trimming unit tray Specifications for Manual Stapling 1 oblique staple and 2 parallel staples O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A4 A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm CT Paper weight 16 24 Ib 20 Ib paper is recommended O Staple capacity 50 sheets max 20 lb paper CT Output tray Primary main tray Stapling amp Folding D E Stapling amp Folding and Trimming 1 oblique staple 2 parallel staples MAN Manual stapling control panel 7 18 Output Modes Output Modes Manual Stapling continued MANUAL OPERATION Staple Mode Staple Start Stop button Selection button 1 Place a set of paper to be stapled into the cover inserter then align the guide plate The indicator light of Staple Start Stop b
85. display the confirmation message when Stop key is pressed 31 Auto select of Booklet copy Set the copier with FN 4 mounted to automatically select the Booklet mode when Stapling amp Folding or Folding output mode is selected 32 E C M password Select the acceptable number of digits for the ECM master key code 33 Arrow key change Image Shift Select the 1 step unit of the touch key to specify the shift amount in Image shift 34 Exit direction of 1 sheet Select to exit face up or face down when making only 1 sheet of copy 35 An interruption suspend way Select the timing to stop the job in progress when Interrupt is pressed 14 44 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 continued 36 E C M password input timing Set the input timing for the ECM password 37 Key click sound No paper JAM Select the duration of the buzzer for alerting that the machine has stopped being out of paper or due to paper misfeed 38 Reserve copy function Set the timing for the reserve job setting 39 Scan stop by a pull out tray Select to stop or continue the scanning job when a tray is pulled out 40 Change page no pos booklet Set the machine to position the page numbers automatically on the outside edges of the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbering in Stamp 41 Trimmer STD Non STD size Set the machine to allow trimming the folded or stapled amp folded sheets in non standard s
86. feature is required 14 26 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Key Operator Data Setting 8 Use this screen to enter the name and extension number of the key operator indicated on the Help Screen developed from the Basic Screen O Setting options 5 digit key operator telephone extension Max 8 character key operator name Key Operator Mode Screen Key Operator Data Setting Screen one of following ite 1 System initial setting 6 Paper type Special size set DD Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj Name ABCDF MUN User setting mode Key operator data setting 4 J ECM function settin Weekly timer bes SRL No 12545 ue Ga 3 RES Esc Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment as Gi W KSM 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 2 Touch 8 Key operator data setting to display the Key Operator Data Setting Screen 3 Touch Name to highlight it then enter the key operator name up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad 4 Touch Key Operator Tel No to highlight it then enter a 5 digit extension number from the touch screen keypad If the extension number is less than 5 digits use a hyphen to make it five The hyphen added in the beginning will be indicated as a space on the Help Screen 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key
87. finisher mode Staple position displayed as the placed originals JOB 10 EXIT TRAY STAPLE lt 1POS gt 4 STAPLE lt 2POS gt OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt a o 2 fa Al A COVER Al A CA sr CH an 9 ki tc hHK re eee e m e o Lal 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Finisher Mode Selection Screen 2 Touch GROUP then OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen The GROUP icon will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area 3 Enter the desired print quantity 4 Position originals in the document handler and make copying selections as required When using Store mode see
88. for duplicate name and displaying the IMAGE DELETE key is available in the Memory switch No 45 of the Key operator setting See p 14 40 p 14 45 9 46 Applications Applications Overlay Memory continued To Store Overlaying Image Data in HDD continued Image Name Entry Screen Image Name Entry Screen O BO ee MARK f Application L Stamp Overlay BEA Eer MARK f Application L Stamp Overlay G H 1 J a R S T IMAGEOO1 F P IMAGEOO1 OK 5 YES NO i 1 CHARACTER Ween DELETE Overlaying Image Data Storing Screen Align original on RADF unit coi SE Please wait O 1 Now storing data to HDD ORIGINAL COUNT 0 MEMORY 100 op 0 STATUS TI OUTPUT COPY MODE COPY DENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION USER2 RADF a 1 00 ISERL Oe SPECIAL D A HAS ORIGINAL 85x11 D ooo uena ZOOM 2 88x14 APPLI 85x115 RE 110175 v o Ea Ee vw 7 Position the overlaying original on the platen glass then press Start to scan NOTES The document handler cannot be used for storing the overlaying image e To stop scanning press Stop 8 After scanning the overlaying original the Overlaying Ima
89. highlight it 2 Touch JOB PRIORITY The highlighted reserve job is advanced by one in printing order unless the job preceding the selected one is already in progress 3 To return to the Basic Screen touch OK on the Job Status Screen To clear reserve job 1 Touch the desired reserve job key to highlight it 2 Touch JOB CLEAR 3 The Job Clear Setting Screen will be displayed Touch YES The highlighted reserve job is cleared 4 To return to the Basic Screen touch OK on the Job Status Screen To display previous job list 1 Touch PREVIOUS JOB LIST to display the Previous Job List Screen 2 Touch to scroll to the next page Previous Job List Screen Up to 16 previous jobs 4 pages PREVIOUS JOB LIST DISP can be displayed Touch to WODE STATUS d Ze return to the previous page COPIER COMPLETE 20 100 3 To return to the Job Status Screen PRINTER COMPLETE 10 10 touch OK COPIER COMPLETE 20 20 4 To return to the Basic Screen touch OK on the Job Status Screen eist 6 24 Basic Operations Basic Operations Reserve continued Mishandled Paper During the Reserve Setting If a misfeed occurs with the print scan job in progress while you are setting a reserve job the PRINT SCAN JOB key on the screen will change to JAM key Basic Screen
90. limit 018888 025000 Ready to copy When your copy count reaches the copy limit the following message is displayed Copy limit reached 025001 025000 In that case contact the key operator to reset your copy limit 3 Make copying selections and enter print quantity as required 4 When all settings are acceptable press Start Copier Management 5 5 Copier Management Weekly Timer Function When a copier is under control of the weekly timer function the Timer indicator on the right side of the control panel is lit Important When the Timer indicator is lit the copier will automatically be turned off Do not turn it off by pressing power switch Timer Interrupt When the Timer indicator light is on and other indicators are off copying is unavailable due to the weekly timer function However copying is available by following procedure Ee OOO OLOJO Interrupt 4 5 6 Proof Copy Utility Start Vy CR Timer 71S nergy Saver On Off Stop 1 Press the Energy Saver On Off The Basic screen will be displayed along with the messages shown below Please wait Copier is warming up Timer interrupt mode Enter password NOTE The timer interrupt password is not factory set and must be entered by the key operator see p 14 36 in Section 14 Key Operator Mode In the event the timer interrupt password has not been entered b
91. low or PM CALL when preventive maintenance is required Machine Information 3 13 Section 4 Paper Information Positioning Originals on the Platen Glass Positioning an Original for Manual Copying Using the Electronic Document Handler EDH Positioning Originals Positioning an SDF Original Positioning Mixed Originals Paper in Main Body Trays Paper in Large Capacity Cassette C 305 Option Paper in Large Capacity Cassette C 305L Option Paper in Automatic Duplex Unit Paper in Multi Sheet Bypass Tray Paper in FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Option FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Primary Main Tray FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Secondary Sub Tray FN 4 Finisher Booklet Tray Paper in Cover Inserter A Option Cover Inserter A Paper in Trimming Unit TMG 1 Option Paper Weight Compatibility Chart Paper Information 4 1 Paper Information Positioning Originals on the Platen Glass Positioning an Original for Manual Copying Use the platen glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document handler e g when size is incompatible or when originals are folded stapled torn or in generally poor condition Specifications O Max original size 11 x17 280mmx432mm sheet or book O Max book weight thickness 15 Ib 6 8kg 1 2 30mm CT Original placement Face down on right depth side of glass 1 Raise the document cover as shown in the illustration below 2 Place original FACE DOWN in the right rear corner a
92. manual staple 16 24 Ib Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice Machine Specifications 17 5 Specifications Trimming Unit TMG 1 Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm Paper weight 16 45 Ib One 110 lb cover paper 200g m thick paper is available Number of trimmed sheets 3 sheets max with Folding mode 16 sheets max with Stapling amp Folding mode 15 sheets max when using a thick cover Trimmed width 10 mm max Stack capacity 512 sheets max The maximum number of sheets varies depending on the number of pages in the booklet and whether Folding or Stapling amp Folding is selected See p 4 11 Power source supply from outlet Large Capacity Cassette C 305 Paper type Plain paper 16 110 Ib 200g m thick paper Paper size 8 5 x11 A4 Dimensions Width 16 9 in 430 mm Depth 25 2 in 639 mm Height 27 2 in 690 mm Weight 66 Ib 30 kg Power source supply from main body Large Capacity Cassette C 305L Paper type Plain paper 16 110 Ib 200g m thick paper Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R A3 B4 A4 A4R F4 Dimensions Width 26 4 in 670 mm Depth 25 2 in 689 mm Height 27 4 in 695 mm Weight 92 4 Ib 42 kg Power source supply from main body Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice 17 6 Machine Specifications Index Index 1 Index NUMBER 180 Rotation 6 32 2 in 1 key 9 10 2
93. minutes 90 minutes 120 minutes or 240 minutes See p 5 4 for details Automatic Duplex Copying To reduce paper consumption use this function to make double sided duplex copies automatically We recommend that you utilize the Auto Low Power function the Automatic Shut Off function and the Automatic Duplex Copying function Thank you for choosing Minolta quality For over 30 years Minolta has been a leader on the forefront of office equipment technology and service Our desire has always been to bring you highly reliable products We pledge to continue to provide you our customer with our state of the art equipment as well as full customer service for all our products We look forward to a long healthy relationship with you and our company If you have any questions or comments about Minolta our product or service please let us know Our fax number is 800 237 8087 for the U S A and Canada Thank you again This operator s manual explains how to operate the copier and replenish its supplies It also gives some troubleshooting tips as well as general precautions to be observed when operating the copier To ensure the best performance and effective use of your copier read this manual carefully until you familiarize yourself thoroughly with the copier s operation and features After you have read through the manual keep it ready for reference Please use this manual as a quick and handy reference tool for immediately clarifying
94. o Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch Repeat to display the Repeat mode selection screen Touch Vertical Horizontal to select the mode then specify the vertical and horizontal widths of the scanning area using up down arrow key or touch ENTER REPEAT WIDTH BY KEYPAD to display a popup screen to enter a value from the touch screen keypad Touch AUTO to allow the machine to set the equal repeat area according to the size of the original placed onto the platen glass with non image area erase functioning Touch 2 Repeat 4 Repeat or 8 Repeat to allow the max repeats according to the size of the original Touch OK to return to the Application selection screen Make additional copying selections Touch OK to return to the Basic screen Enter the print quantity amount Position original s face down on the platen glass If you selected the AUTO or 2 4 8 Repeat keep the document cover open during copying Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine Frame Fold Erasure p 9 29 1 2 3 o Joo E o Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch Frame Fold Erasure to display the Frame Fold erasure selection screen Touch Frame Erasure All sides or Frame Erasure Each side then enter a value or use the default setting Touch Fold Erasure then enter a value or use the default setting Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Application se
95. of 3 sheet folded booklet 33 x 3 99 sheets 50 sets max of 2 sheet folded booklet 50 x 2 100 sheets gt 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A3 B4 A4R gt 11 x17 W 8 5 x11 WR A3W B4W A4WR 16 24 b 16 sheets max using 20lb paper only 15 sheets max a thick cover paper included Approx 100 sheets max 20 sets max of 5 sheet folded booklet 20 x 5 100 sheets 10 sets max of 10 sheet folded booklet 10 x 10 100 sheets 6 sets max of 16 sheet folded booklet 6 x 16 96 sheets Inside the Booklet mode outlet is the roller drive unit DO NOT put your hand into the roller drive unit when removing folded or stapled amp folded sheets otherwise you may be injured Paper in Cover Inserter A Option Cover Inserter A Standard Paper Size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 A5 Wide Paper Size 11 x17 W 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 WR 5 5 x8 5 W A3W B4W A4W A4WR B5W A5W Paper Weight in Cover Sheet Mode 13 110 Ib 200g m thick paper Paper Weight in Manual Staple 16 24 Ib 4 10 Paper Information Paper Information Paper in Trimming Unit TMG 1 Option Trimming mode Paper Size gt 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A4R Paper Weight 16 24 Ib One 46 110 Ib sheet only used as a cover Number of Trimmed Sheet 3 sheets max with Folding mode 16 sheets max using 20 lb paper only with Stapling amp Folding mode 15 sheets max using one cover she
96. of Repeat has been already selected the PAGE SPACE key appears clear on the screen to show its availability with PAGE SPACE indication displayed in the image area If desired touch PAGE SPACE to highlight it then enter the desired amount using the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key 8 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Application Selection Screen 9 Select additional Application functions or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 10 Enter the desired print quantity 11 Position original s FACE UP in document handler or FACE DOWN on platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 12 Press Start After copying is completed touch Image Shift on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine Applications 9 37 Applications Stamp Stamp allows you to print regular stamp numbering page numbering date and time watermark and watermark numbering onto the output copies These 6 types of stamps can be used individually or in multiple combinations e STAMP prints the letters selected from 8 options onto the scanned image at the location designated on the screen e SET NUMBERING prints the numbers in the specified form over the scanned image
97. operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password Key Operator Mode 14 23 Key Operator Mode Paper Type Special Size Set 6 Use this function to indicate a specific paper type or to specify a special paper size for each tray key on the Basic Screen This is especially useful when special paper is used on a regular basis and is always placed in a specific paper tray Key Operator Mode Screen ele g ite 1 System initial setting 2 Copier initial setting Paper Type Setting Screen 6 Paper type Special size set Normal Jormal 7 Panel contrast Key sound adj Thick 1 Recycle Thick 2 Color 2 Thin Thin Special TAB PAPER Fine User Seal Normal 8 Key operator data setting ECM function setting 9 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment PREVIOUS Special size 3 User setting made Fine Special Size Setting Screen STD size special Special Size Setting Screen STD size g STD size E g e STD size Non STD size S A3W Wide paper Paper type setting Special Size STD size 1 57 STD size 2 STD size Aa STD S 8 5x11R Wide paper Paper type setting STD size STD size special g 7 STD size Non STD size Paper type setting Special Size Setting Screen Input size CANCEL Setting Screen Non STD size INPUT SIZE 123mm ZS CANCEL INPUT SIZE ie 123mm
98. or open book Copy paper size 8 5 x11 letter CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions APS AMS Rotation Sort Rotation Group Folding Stapling amp Foldings Trimming with Booklet CT Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Tab Paper CT Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Combination Image Insert Program Job Repeat Reduce amp Shift in Image Shift Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory 1 1 mode 1 2 mode Q A d z Application Selection Screen Book Copy Screen o o Select desired BOOK COPY function BOOK Leer m bw Non image RECH en e Sen Interleave L Area Erase Ld 1 Layout FUNCTION GE A moo Si BRE T i Lett binding a poe Booklet Tata e Overlay _ Po Full scan rome rut scan En Applications 9 19 Applications Book Copy continued 1 2 3 O Load 8 5 x11 sheets in a tray or in the Multi sheet bypass tray Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen Touch Book Copy to enter the Book Copy Screen AUTO layout and Non image area erase will be automatically selected Available to be released Touch Full scan Front cover Full scan or Front Back cover Full scan as required Touch REVERSE THE SIDE OF OPEN PAGE to change the binding mode according to the original Option Touch Booklet on the Book Copy Screen to use this function Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen Make additional application selections or t
99. p 6 27 to p 6 29 5 Press Start A CAUTION When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected remove the copied sets while the paper is exiting otherwise mishandled paper will occur 7 10 Output Modes Output Modes Output Modes Using Secondary Sub Tray In addition to the Primary main tray FN 104 FN 4 Finisher is equipped with a Secondary sub tray that can be selected on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen The Secondary sub tray provides 4 types of output mode as specified below also to be specified on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen 1 Face down non sort exit 3 Face down group exit 2 Face up non sort exit 4 Face up group exit O Paper size 11 x17 5 5 x8 5 CT Paper weight 16 24 Ib CT Paper capacity for 20 Ib 200 sheets Non sort Face down Finisher Mode Selection Screen i TER ale er mode Align original on EDH u JOB 10 EXIT TRAY OUTPUT lt SUB TRAY gt OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt a Em SUB 1 Group _ cover GROUP SHEET TRAY SORT WI FACE E e UP STAPLING CPI amp FOLDING Gap EME DOWN LZ FOLDING RECALL STANDARD _CANCEL Non sort Face up Finisher Mode Selection Screen ian oriainalio
100. pages on the right side front pages of the finished document Only duplex mode 1 2 or 2 2 is compatible Introduction 1 5 Introduction Features of the Di750 continued e Combination Copy a fixed number 2 4 or 8 of pages onto one sheet of copy paper e Copy Density Manually select up to 9 density levels e Copy Mode Select the desired simplex mode 1 1 or 2 1 or duplex mode 1 2 or 2 2 e Counter List Display on the screen and print the following data for confirmation total counter of the machine copier counter print counter and the date when the counter started e Density Shift Shift each seven density levels of 4 density modes Auto Text Photo Increase Contrast into two levels to lighter and three levels to darker e Energy Saver Automatically turns off all but nominal power supply after a specified period of copier inactivity for optimal efficiency Power is returned after a brief warm up period by pressing Energy Saver On Off key on the Control panel e Frame Fold Erasure Erase border and or fold image area using Frame 1 15mm Fold 1 30mm or Frame amp Fold e HDD Store While operating ordinary copying job store image data in HDD option for future printing e Image Insert Store pages in memory from the platen glass and insert the pages into a document copied from the document handler e Image Rotation Image Rotation rotates the image before copying when the crosswise lengthwi
101. place paper into the tray with the curl turning up Load size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R or 5 5 x8 5 crosswise Do not stack paper above the level of the red line Move the green levers located at the front and left side until they meet the edge of the stack of paper When paper is seated properly push the tray back fully into the copier LCC Large Capacity Cassette C 305 C 305L Service Adjustable Tray 4 4 000 1 2 3 4 5 Open the LCC upper door lift lid Press the Paper load button located at the front of the LCC to lower the bottom place of the LCC Load the fixed size paper into the LCC with the paper curl turning down see note Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the bottom plate cannot go down any more Do not stack paper above the paper hook level When the stack of paper is seated properly in the tray close the LCC upper door lid NOTE When loading Tab sheets be sure the tab extensions are positioned at the rear side of the tray not at the front where the Paper load button is located and jutting to the right away from the hinged side of the LCC cover Adding Toner p 15 7 A CAUTION Keep toner cartridge away from children Although the toner is non toxic do not inhale it or allow it to enter your eyes In case the toner comes in contact with eyes please consult your physician 1 2 3 Open the machine front door and pull out the toner unit 90 to the right Move the toner cartri
102. press OK GK E 8 pg FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT stomp Over lay d STAMP WATERMARK OYERLAY Area Erase ee Ke e Chay Reverse All image STAMP PAGE WATERMARK OYERLAY D pter image A H Area NUMBERING ks Die Image Shit ray GC DATE TIME FramelFold Stamp erer Erasure z Overlay ALL CLEAR J CANCEL CANCEL ox WATERMARK NUMBERING OVERLAY MEMORY SET NUMBERING 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Stamp Overlay The Stamp Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed 3 Touch OVERLAY to highlight it 4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 5 Make additional application selections or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 6 The Store mode is automatically selected and APS and AMS are released Set the desired Copy mode Copy density Lens mode and Copy size on the Basic Screen Applications 9 43 Applications Overlay continued 7 Enter the desired print quantity 8 Position the overlaying original in the document handler or on the platen glass then press Start to scan 9 The second and subsequent pages are to be overlaid in printing Place them in the document handler or on the platen glass then press Start IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN REGULA
103. satisfactorily Copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 Incompatible Basic Copying Condition 1 1 2 2 Incompatible Special Original Resolution Very high Incompatible Applications Book Copy Non Image Area Erase Repeat except 2 4 8 Repeat AUTO Layout Storing image in Overlay Memory g g g g 6 32 Basic Operations Basic Operations Rotation continued To Release Automatic Rotation The copier is initially set to activate the Rotation function automatically To release automatic Rotation Basic Screen COUNT SET
104. sheets as front covers for copied sets output to the Main tray or use the sheets as booklet type covers for copied sets output to the Booklet tray in the Folding or Stapling amp Folding mode NOTES Paper loaded into the cover sheet feeder cannot be copied e This function is incompatible with cover sheet mode COVER WITH COPY SHEET and COVER WITH BLANK SHEET in Booklet and Thick paper mode in Sheet Cover Insertion CT Cover paper size 11 x17 5 5 x8 5 13 110 Ib 200g m2 cover paper O Copy paper size 11 x17 5 5 x8 5 20 Ib paper recommended CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Output to Secondary sub tray Rotation Sort Rotation Group CT Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original with APS CT Incompatible Applications Cover Sheet mode in Booklet T Cover sheet Copied set with
105. store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make the Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 Press Start After copying is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine NO CO Special Original 8 9 Special Original Special Original continued Z Folded Original Use the Z folded original mode with the document feeder to copy Z folded originals so as not to cause paper misfeed O Use EDH O EDH capacity Max 100 sheets CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Using platen glass CT Incompatible Special Original Resolution Very high Mixed Original SDF Tab Paper CT Incompatible Applications Non image area erase Repeat AUTO layout Storing image in Overlay Memory Special Original Screen JOB 10 IMAGE QUALITY Text Photo ENHANCE SPECIAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL High mode Increase TS Mixed Original E Non STD size 5 Z Folded fe Photo A original L57 600 dpi Text SDF Sen 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original Screen 2 Touch Z
106. the copy limit is reached to stop immediately or after a job is completed or to only display a warning message Key Operator Mode 14 15 Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 continued How to Access the ECM Setting Mode Key Operator Mode Screen ECM Master Key Code Screen one of following ite 1 System initial setting D Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting E C M master key code KK OK k OK k K K ECM function setting 9 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment PREVIOUS SCREEN Ge ECM Setting Menu Screen elect one of follo g 1 J ECM data edit 2 ECM all count reset E C M function setting PREVIOUS SCREEN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 If the key operator password is not valid check with your service representative 2 Touch 4 E C M function setting The ECM Master Key Code Screen displays if a code is required 3 Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 8 digit ECM master key code then touch OK to display the ECM Setting Menu Screen See note 2 4 Select the desired ECM function and make settings as required To exit the ECM mode touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on ECM Setting
107. the selected job and to return to the Basic Screen To cancel the job press Panel Reset 6 Press Start NOTES 1 A locked job is indicated by a lock icon on the Job key number 2 Only the key operator can lock a job 3 A locked job cannot be overwritten unless it is unlocked by the key operator 4 A blank key indicates that no job is storedw under that key P kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk displayed on a Job number key indicates that a job is stored but unnamed 6 Program Memory entries can be recorded on the Program Memory Form included at the end of this section Program Memory 10 5 Program Memory Program Memory Form Make a copy of this form to record frequently used copy jobs stored in Program Memory Update the information when changes are made Make additional copies as needed JOB NUMBER NAME JOB DESCRIPTION 10 6 Program Memory Program Memory Program Memory Form continued JOB NUMBER NAME JOB DESCRIPTION Program Memory 10 7 e of follo SCANNER Section 11 Server Function Server Function Image Store Delete Mode To Store Image Data in HDD To Delete Image Data Image Store amp Output Mode Image Recall Mode de Hon IMAGE STOREIDELETE Server Function 11 1 Server Function Server Function Use Server function to accumulate scanned images into built in DIMM memory then store the image data in HUDD option so that the data can be recalled to DIMM
108. the Reserve Seiting When Paper is Depleted for the Job in Progress Store Mode Platen Store Mode EDH Store Mode Rotation 90 Rotation Align original on EDH unit Jc Sy cours 90 Rotation and APS co i 90 Rotation and AMS COPY MODE COPY DENSITY LENS MODE 180 Rotation SE SSC OO To Release Automatic Rotation aus Check Mode and Proof Copy ZOOM SH WEI Interrupt Mode Help Mode Using the Multi Sheet Bypass Tray Basic Operations 6 1 Basic Operations How to Make a Basic Copy The Basic Screen When power is turned on the Basic Screen displays after warm up when Energy Saver mode is activated when ECM password is set when Key counter is used or when Panel Reset mode is manually or automatically restored All copying selections can be initiated from the Basic Screen whether selected with screen keys or conventional keys such as Program Memory When the Electronic Copy Monitor ECM is activated a valid 8 digit ECM password assigned by the key operator must be entered before copying can be performed See p 5 5 All of the settings in the Basic Screen except Print Quantity can be changed by the key operator in the Initial Setting Menu Screen Rotation Resolution 600dpi HDD Tandem icon Basic Screen Original count ovens Messages and
109. then choose a desired repeat image mode another screen will display when you touch ENTER REPEAT WIDTH BY KEYPAD which allows you to specify the repeat width using the touch screen keypad Check BOOK MARK in the message area of the subsequent screen if desired so that the screen may be directly accessed from the Check Screen to change the setting you made When all settings are made for each function the OK key can be touched to complete the settings and return you to the Application Selection Screen If no other Applications are desired the OK key can be touched again to complete your selections and bring you back to the Basic Screen With the Basic Screen displayed you can press the Start key to perform the operation To restore the original copying conditions touch CANCEL To clear all Application settings touch ALL CLEAR Basic Screen Application Selection Screen Applicatio d JOB 10 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Sheet Cover Transparency Non image Wen TE AUTO NS reeticover pF p SR Ss Chapter Image Insert E A B An mage Interleave Area Erase Layout H Pate 1 2 AAA A Combination S Book Copy Repeat bz Image Shift Program FrameiFold ff Stamp Booklet Job Gy Erasure E H Pr
110. time Setting time Summer time 2 Language select setting Japanese English 3 IP address setting IP address Subnetmask Gateway address Line speed Copy mode EDH 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 Copy density AES manual Lens mode AMS ratio 0 33 4 00 Paper size APS trays 1 2 3 4 or Multi sheet bypass tray Output Output appli Staple sort Sort Function Special original Rotation off 1 User density level 1 setting darker lighter 16 levels 2 User density level 2 setting darker lighter 16 levels 3 User lens mode ratio setting Userset 1 Userset 2 Userset 3 ratio 0 33 4 00 1 E C M data edit Change Add Delete 2 E C M all count reset YES NO 3 E C M function setting ECM On ECM Off Immediately After job Warning 5 Lock delete program memory Paper type Blank Normal Thick 1 Thick 2 Recycle Thin Color TAB PAPER Special User Fine Seal Special size STD size STD size special Non STD size Wide paper Panel contrast Backlight contrast Buzzer volume regulation Name Key Operator Tel No 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting On Off 2 Timer setting ON time OFF time 3 Timer action ON OFF setting ON OFF 4 Lunch hour Off setting Valid Invalid 5 Timer interrupt password setting 4 digit password ATS APS switch ON OFF Tray priority Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 LCC Bypass 14 4 Key Operator Mode Key O
111. to be stapled See the table below Paper Capacity for Staple sort mode of FN 104 FN 4 Finisher for the same size only 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 W HATTA TW ASIASW Sur AAPUAAWR BS BSWABVASW No of copies 2 staples 1 staple 2 staples 1 staple 2 9 50 sets 50 sets 100 sets 100 sets 10 20 50 50 50 50 21 30 30 30 30 30 31 40 25 25 25 25 41 50 20 20 20 20 Service can set the copier to stop copying when the number of copies exceeds above capacity Contact your service representative FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Secondary Sub Tray Finisher FN 104 FN 4 capacities at 20Ib unless otherwise indicated 200 sheets max 12 36 x17 52 314mmx445mm min 3 94 x5 83 100mmx148mm AA CAUTION When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected remove the copied sets while the paper is exiting otherwise mishandled paper will occur Paper Information 4 9 Paper Information Paper in FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Option continued FN 4 Finisher Booklet Tray Folding mode Standard Paper Size Wide Paper Size Paper Weight Number of Folded Sheet Booklet Tray Capacity Stapling amp Folding mode Standard Paper Size Wide Paper Size Paper Weight Number of Folded Sheet Booklet Tray Capacity A CAUTION gt 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A3 B4 A4R gt 11 x17 W 8 5 x11 WR A3W B4W A4WR 16 24 lb 3 sheets max Approx 100 sheets max 33 sets max
112. to function anytime in EDH mode 9 Automatic tray switching When paper is depleted during a copying job the copier continues copying by switching to another tray that contains the same size paper 10 Platen APS The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on the platen glass In reduction or enlargement mode an appropriate paper size is selected according to the ratio selected 14 42 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 continued 11 EDH APS The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on the EDH In reduction enlargement mode an appropriate paper size is selected according to the ratio 12 Platen AMS The copier detects the size of the platen original and selects the appropriate magnification ratio to correspond to the selected paper size 13 EDH AMS After detecting the original size placed on the EDH the copier automatically selects an appropriate ratio for the copy when copy size is selected manually 14 Select tray when APS cancel Select the tray to be automatically selected when APS is released 15 Platen original size detect Select the series of the original paper size detected from the platen glass 16 EDH original size detect Select the series of the original paper size detected from the EDH 17 Platen orig size detect SMALL Select the minimum original size detected from the platen glass
113. to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 NOTE When loading originals heed the following limits on capacity Folding Folding and Trimming mode 6 pages or less for simplex copying 12 pages or less for duplex copying Stapling amp Folding Stapling amp Folding and Trimming mode 32 pages or less for simplex copying 64 pages or less for duplex copying Exceeding the above limits on capacity may cause trouble in the finisher Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make the Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 13 Press Start NOTE CLOSE THE TRIMMER STACKER COVER otherwise the machine cannot print copy DO NOT OPEN THE TRIMMER STACKER COVER DURING PRINTING COPYING otherwise the machine will cease operating and a paper misfeed will occur After copying is completed touch Booklet on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine A CAUTION The roller drive unit is located inside the Booklet tray of the finisher DO NOT put your hand into the roller drive unit when removing folded or stapled amp folded sheets otherwise you may be injured 9 14 Applications Applications Transparency Interleave Use the Transparency interleave function in 1 1 or 2 1 mode to copy onto overhead projection transparencies and output a blank or copied interleaf sheet with each copied transparency
114. to scroll to the desired wide size then specify the precise dimensions of paper to be used following the procedure below 1 Touch Input size The Size Input popup menu will be displayed 2 Touch the vertical size key to highlight it then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the vertical size or use arrows to scroll to that number The entered number should fall within the range from the vertical size of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size to the maximum of 314mm 3 Similarly touch the horizontal size key to highlight it then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the horizontal size or use arrows to scroll that number The entered number should fall within the range from the horizontal size of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size to the maximum of 445mm 4 Touch Select size to return to the Select Size popup menu Touch Lead edge or Rear edge to select the image starting position 4 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 6 20 Basic Operations Basic Operations Reserve Set Reserve Job The Reserve function allows you to set up a new job while a current scan print job is in process When the current job is finished the Reserve job starts printing immediately The FREE JOB key on the screen is touch sensitive and active only when another job is in progress otherwise it appears grayed out CT Job settings Max 5 current job plus 4 reserve jobs O The reserve job is a
115. touch OK to display the Job Name Entry Screen Enter the desired job name in up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct job name 5 If the job name is correct touch OK to display the Scanner Setting Screen 6 Select the desired scanning conditions Print quantity cannot be entered 7 Position original s FACE UP in the document handler or FACE DOWN on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 11 4 Server Function Server Function Image Store Delete Mode continued To Store Image Data in HDD continued Image Data Storing Screen Scanner to HDD Image Data Storing Screen Scanner to HDD E gt oo o gt f 8 Press Start to scan original s When scanning is completed the Image Data Storing Screen will be displayed When store mode is used touch to deselect STORE on the Scanner Setting Screen after all originals are scanned The Image Data Storing Screen will be displayed 9 The machine automatically begins storing data in the HDD The Basic Screen resumes when the storing function is completed NOTE To suspend the storing job touch CANCEL on the Image Data Storing Screen then touch YES on the popup menu to delete the data or touch NO to continue Server Function 11 5 Server Function
116. your copier Preventive Maintenance PM will be required for maintaining optimal performance When preventive maintenance is due a message will prompt you to contact your service representative for maintenance Reading the PM Counter Control Panel Counter List Screen O Printer O E Serial Number 55 VE00003 Az 000 zm Total counter 12345676 12 01 00 Mode Check Help Counter list Lm 7 2 Copier counter 12345678 output Program Memory Printer counter 12345676 Ei c PM counter 12345678 99999999 12 01 00 Panel Reset Utility a Press P Utility to display the Counter List Screen 2 Press Mode Check to display the PM count on the Counter List Screen 3 Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen Printing the PM Counter 1 Press P Utility to display the Counter List Screen 2 Press Mode Check to display the PM counter on the Counter List Screen 3 Touch Counter list output The Basic Screen will be displayed 4 Touch the desired tray key to select the copy size 5 Press Start The counter list will be printed out and the list print mode will be released 15 10 Maintenance amp Supplies Maintenance amp Supplies Cleaning the Left Partition Glass The glass partition at the far left of the platen glass is designed for real time scanning from the EDH Keep this glass clean otherwise soil marks may be copied res
117. 0 angle B6R size original type A3 B4 11x17 8 5x14 F4 orig type Staple mode reset function Job offset operating Continuation print SDF Auto start Key click sound 1 SHOT indication time Energy saver screen Start key latch function Stop key function Auto select of Booklet copy E C M password Arrow key change Image Shift Exit direction of 1 sheet An interruption suspended way E C M password input timing Setting default is underlined OFF 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec 120 sec 150 sec 180 sec 210 sec 240 sec 270 sec 300 sec Full Auto Initial Setting EDH Panel Reset key selected EDH selected OFF ON Face down Sub tray Non sort Sort Staple sort Folding amp Stapling Folding Face up Sub tray OFF ON Erased for except Platen 1 1 Area outside of orig erased Erased for APS AMS only None 1mm frame 2mm frame 3mm frame 4mm frame 5mm frame OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON APS preferential tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Bypass tray Only A series Full size AB series Inch series Only A series Full size AB series Inch series A5R B6R 5 5 x8 5 R ON APS AMS only ON APS AMS Reduce only ON Always ON Always According to Rotation OFF tray Lengthwise Crosswise Lengthwise Crosswise OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Memory mode only OFF ON 3 seconds 5 seconds Shut off mode Low power mode OFF ON JOB momentary stop JOB cancel Automatic sele
118. 00 sheets 20 Ib feed exit capacity Mixed mode 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 or 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Max 100 sheets 20 Ib feed exit capacity Original weight 13 34 Ib bond curl max 10 mm or less Transparency Paste up Offset master Labels amp Intermediate papers unavailable Main body trays 1 2 3 500 500 1 000 sheets LCC tray 4 4 000 sheets Multi sheet bypass tray 150 sheets Tray 1 2 3 user adjustable Tray 4 adjusted by service 150 sheets 20 Ib 20 Ib 24 Ib bond recommended Max range 16 lb 45 Ib in 1 2 or 2 2 copying 16 lb 110 Ib 200g m thick paper in 1 1 or 2 1 copying OHP sheet Transparency Labels Tab 3 hole UL 1950 CSA 22 2 No 950 95 FCC Rules part 15 sub part B Class A Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice Machine Specifications 17 3 Specifications Options Machine Weight Machine Dimensions Finisher FN 104 FN 4 Cover Inserter A Trimming Unit TMG 1 Large Capacity Cassette LCC C 305 C 305L 64MB Memory M64 1 128MB Memory M128 1 Printer Controller Pi7500 HDD 616 Ib 280 kg 47 lb 21 5 kg W EDH 110 Ib 50 kg w Finisher 66 Ib 30 kg w LCC C 305 Main Body with EDH Width 34 9 in 887mm Depth 30 5 in 775mm Height 45 7 in 1160mm Document Handler EDH Width 25 6 in 650mm Depth 22 4 in 670mm Height 6 7 in 170mm Max open angle 705 Finisher FN 104 FN 4 Width 21 7 in
119. 2 Repeat Transparency interleave Non image area erase Server function EDH capacity 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 100 sheets copying can be resumed after removing paper from bins EDH original size requirements 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm Copy paper weight requirements 20 b 24 Ib 14 lb 19 Ib should be tested before it is used Copy paper size requirements 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R 5 5 x8 5 paper is available in lengthwise type feeding only Sort mode paper size machine with FN 104 FN 4 Finisher 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm 5 5 x8 5 paper is available in lengthwise type feeding only Staple Sort mode paper size machine with FN 104 FN 4 Finisher 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm Folding or Stapling amp Folding mode paper size machine with FN 4 Finisher 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm Cover Inserter paper size FN 4 Finisher with Cover Inserter 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A4 A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm 6 4 Basic Operations Basic Operations Copy Mode continued Copy Mode Using EDH Before selecting the Copy Mode shown on the screen below read specifications on the previous page and see Section 4 for information o
120. 2 1 mode If image loss is likely select the Reduce amp Shift mode instead of regular Image shift Page space function is available only when Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been already selected Use this function to make the desired amount of blank space between the two images on a page O Shift amount in Image Shift mode 0 250 mm in 1 mm increments Setting in 0 1 mm increments using up down arrow key is also available by key operator setting To be set collectively or individually for the front and back pages O Shift amount in Reduce amp Shift mode 0 250 mm in 1 mm increments Setting in 0 1 mm increments using up down arrow key is also available by key operator setting To be set collectively for the front and back pages however the shift amount for the back page can be altered in order to position the image exactly the same as on the front page In Reduce amp Shift mode AMS is automatically selected and cannot be released Page Space functions only when Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat is previously selected Original copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R Incompatible conditions with Image Shift mode Basic copying conditions None Special Originals None Applications AUTO Layout Storing image in Overlay Memory CT Incompatible conditions with Reduce amp Shift mode Basic copying conditions Change magnification V H zoom APS Special Originals Mixed Original Applications Book Copy Non I
121. 2 3 8 er Back 2048 5 6 1 4 BOTH RIGHT 7 8 9 0 15 0mm SIDES SHIFT S PAGE SPACE PAGE LEFT Omm Gites SHIFT A v 1 1 mode 2 1 mode 4 4 gt 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 zd f Originals 1 Copies Originals Copies 1 2 mode 4 ts 3 2 1 Originals Copies Originals Applications 9 35 Applications Image Shift continued Select the copy mode and copy size from the Basic Screen as required Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to enter the Application Selection Screen Touch Image Shift to display the Image Shift Selection Screen Touch Image Shift or Reduce amp Shift To set shift amount in Image Shift 1 Touch FRONT BACK or BOTH SIDES When BOTH SIDES is selected the entered shift direction and amount will be reflected immediately in the FRONT and BACK Images on the screen Touch FRONT or BACK to specify the shift direction and amount individually NEEME NENN SE MEEN BE D DOWN RIGHT LEFT UP amp RIGHT UP amp LEFT DOWN amp RIGHT DOWN amp LEFT OO E ob 2 Touch UP SHIFT DOWN SHIFT RIGHT SHIFT or LEFT SHIFT to specify the shift direction then use the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key to select the desire
122. 2 If the same period of time as Auto Shut Off is selected for Auto Low Power the Auto Shut Off will function instead of Auto Low Power Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NO oO Key Operator Mode 14 39 Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 This function allows you to change the Memory Settings listed below See pp 14 41 14 45 for details on Memory Settings SW No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Hem Panel reset timer Panel Reset key function EDH Original effect Program memory auto recall 30 Finisher mode by Full auto Initial by Key counter insert Erasure outside area of orig EDH frame erasure selection Automatic tray switching Platen APS EDH APS Platen AMS EDH AMS Select tray when APS cancel Platen original size detect EDH original size detect Platen orig size detect SMALL Rotation Rotation 18
123. 3 Press Start The print job will be reprocessed 4 Touch FREE JOB to continue setting the reserve job 6 26 Basic Operations Basic Operations Store Mode Store mode allows you to scan multiple originals by touching the STORE key on the Basic Screen after setting copying conditions and then outputting the complete set by pressing Start Platen store mode scan originals from the platen glass EDH store mode scan originals from the EDH Platen Store Mode Use Platen store mode for originals that cannot be fed through the document handler due to thickness size or condition When scanning thick originals that require keeping the document cover open select Non image area erase to prevent exposure of the glass area around the border of the original This feature ensures a clean copy result and reduces toner consumption The Non image area erase mode automatically releases after the original for which it is selected is scanned Additional images may be scanned CT Incompatible Basic copying conditions None CT Incompatible Special Originals None CT Incompatible Applications Storing image in Overlay Memory Basic Screen
124. 3 Touch the desired key Paper Type Size Selection Screen JOB 10 TYPE SIZE ra S Itis auto detect in the case of Thick p 2 STD size STD size r STD size Wl E Br special Tab paper S Non STD size Wide paper e When Thick Thin Tab paper OHP Tracing or User is highlighted a printing job will be performed conforming to the selected paper type If no paper type indication is needed touch the highlighted key to clear the selection in the TYPE area The selection will be reflected on the Basic Screen when restored NOTE When selecting Thick THICK 1 will be displayed on Bypass key of the Basic Screen e When selecting Tab paper AMS is automatically selected The STD size special and Non STD size cannot be selected and the loading copy paper cannot be fed in 1 2 or 2 2 copying 6 18 Basic Operations Basic Operations Copy Size continued Selecting Paper Type Size for Multi sheet Bypass Tray continued Paper Type Size Selection Screen and JOB 10 TYPE SIZE Thick p STD size ze i A4R H STD size tin D B v Tab paper S Non STD size Wide paper e When STD size special is highlighted the popup menu will appear Use arrows to scroll to the desired size In this case both the copy size and type selected will be indicated on the Basic Screen Paper Type Size Selection Screen pe of special pape SIZE SIZE INPUT 3 Thick 4 S
125. 30mm A3 11 69 x16 54 297mm x 420mm B4 10 11 x14 33 257mm x 364mm A4 8 27 x11 69 210mm x 297mm B5 7 17 x10 11 182mm x 257mm A5 5 85 x8 27 148mm x 210mm e 5 5 x8 5 A5 copy paper is available in crosswise orientation loading only Wide Paper Size 11 x17 W 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 WR 5 5 x8 5 W A3W DAN A4W A4WR BSW A5W user adjustable NOTES e 8 5 x14 W copy paper is not available e Wide paper size setting for each tray can be made in the Key operator mode See p 14 24 p 14 25 Paper Weight General tray 16 24 Ib Tray specified in Thick 1 25 45 Ib Tray specified in Thick 2 46 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper 1 1 or 2 1 copy mode only NOTE Paper type setting Thick 1 or Thick 2 for each tray can be made in the Key operator mode See p 14 24 p 14 25 Total Paper Capacity 2 150 sheets including 150 sheet Multi Sheet Bypass Tray Tray 1 2 500 sheets 20lb user adjustable to any standard wide size from 11 x17 W 5 5 x8 5 W Tray 3 1 000 sheets 20lb user adjustable to any standard wide size from 11 x17 W 5 5 x8 5 W Paper in Large Capacity Cassette C 305 Option Standard Paper Size 8 5 x11 or A4 service adjustable Wide Paper Size 8 5 x11 W or A4W service adjustable Paper Weight 16 24 Ib LCC specified in Thick 1 25 45 Ib LCC specified in Thick 2 46 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper 1 1 or 2 1 copying only NOTE Paper type setting Thick1 or Thick 2 for LCC can be made in the Key operator mode Se
126. 5 until all originals are scanned Touch STORE to exit the Store mode Press Start to begin copying NOTES 1 Page numbers indicated next to each Shortcut refer to the pages of the Operator s Manual where more detailed information can be found 2 When using Platen Store mode or EDH Store mode in conjunction with other functions check details on p 6 27 and p 6 29 respectively 13 2 Shortcuts Shortcuts Stapling amp Folding Folding and Trimming p 7 13 1 2 3 o Joo E Close the EDH document handler cover then press Panel Reset to reset the machine Touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Finisher mode selection screen Touch STAPLING amp FOLDING to select the Stapling amp Folding mode with Trimming mode automatically selected or touch FOLDING to select the Folding mode Touch TRIM to select deselect the Trimming mode as desired Touch OK to display the Basic screen Make additional copying selections Enter the print quantity amount Position originals on the EDH tray Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine Mixed Original p 8 8 OO E ob A NO 8 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL to display the Special original screen Touch Mixed Original Make additional copying selections Touch OK to return to the Basic screen Select APS to copy on various sizes to match the originals or select AMS mode to copy on one size Enter the print quantity amount P
127. 8 5 CT Bypass tray paper weight range 16 Ib 45 Ib CT Bypass tray paper capacity up to 150 sheets 20 Ib CT Bypass tray Transparency film capacity 1 sheet 1 Open the Multi sheet bypass tray located on the right side of the copier When loading 11 x17 or 8 5 x14 paper withdraw the right edge of the Multi sheet bypass tray 2 Load copy paper and align the paper guides to the paper size Load Transparency film one sheet at a time or stack paper up to 150 sheets 20 Ib Bond Basic Operations 6 41 Basic Operations Using the Multi Sheet Bypass Tray continued Load offset tabbed sheets so that the tab extensions are on the right at the rear not front of the tray The top sheet is designated face up as the first tab of the finished set Subsequent offset tab sheets follow in sequence When loading tabbed sheets in the Multi sheet bypass tray be sure to specify the paper type as Tab paper on the Paper Type Size Selection Screen otherwise mishandled paper may occur See p 6 18 to p 6 20 Example 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set 1st TAB Introduction Section 1 Introduction Printed _ side ONE FINISHED SET Example 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets st TABS 1st TAB Ss 2nd TAB 2nd TABS Section 1 Section 1 Section 1 Introduction Introduction Introduction Introducttion P
128. 8 8 to p 8 9 O Mixed original size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 R and 5 5 x8 5 mixed 13 lb 34 Ib 5 5 x8 5 original is available in crosswise type feeding only CT EDH capacity Max 100 sheets 20 Ib bond paper O Print quantity Max 9 999 sheets CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Rotation Exit Staple Sort with APS Folding Stapling amp Folding in APS Reserve with APS CT Incompatible Special Originals Resolution Very high Non STD Size O Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Image Shift Overlay Before using the Mixed Original mode be sure the EDH is closed completely Arrange originals in order and place them as described below Place 11 x17 8 5 x14 originals face up or side 1 up in the EDH tray in lengthwise orientation i e with short edge feeding Position 8 5 x11 size in either crosswise or lengthwise orientation Position 5 5 x8 5 size in crosswise orientation only 2 Position mixed originals FACE UP aligned with the left rear side of the EDH tray 3 Adjust paper guides to originals ech 4 6 Paper Information Paper Information Paper in Main Body Trays Standard Paper Size 11 x17 F4 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 user adjustable NOTES e F4 8 x13 203mm x 3
129. ADE AFTER PASSWORD IS ENTERED Check to see if the message EXCEEDS LIMIT is displayed Contact key operator to reset limit FINISHER DOES NOT OPERATE Press OUTPUT APPLI key Check for a paper misfeed and remove it as required Properly close finisher door EDH INDICATOR WILL NOT LIGHT AFTER PANEL RESET IS PRESSED Fully close EDH EDH LIGHT IS FLASHING The document handler is ready to accept originals Insert originals on EDH tray press Panel Reset then Start ADD TONER MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED New toner supply is needed Follow instructions for adding toner Troubleshooting 16 9 Troubleshooting Copying Hints continued CALL FOR PM IS DISPLAYED IN MESSAGE AREA Contact your service representative for Preventive Maintenance APS SELECTS THE WRONG PAPER SIZE Paper guides must be adjusted exactly to the size of originals IN MIXED ORIGINAL MODE A MESSAGE TO LOAD A REQUIRED PAPER SIZE DISPLAYS EVEN THOUGH THAT SIZE IS LOADED IN ONE OF THE TRAYS Paper sizes loaded in the trays must be consistent with the tray position size otherwise the tray key on the Basic Screen will blink THE BASIC SCREEN DOES NOT DISPLAY SETTINGS AS DESCRIBED IN OPERATOR S MANUAL Check with the key operator as Initial Settings may have been changed USING TRIMMER COPIES CANNOT BE TRIMMED Check to see if the message Trash basket of Trimmer is full is displayed Empty trash basket PLEASE CHECK ORIGINAL This message displays when the c
130. ARK function and press OK SET NUMBERING DENSITY CHARACTER ES LIGHT Sepi 0001 0002 0003 1 2 3 NORMAL STARTING No Rot ae DARK 1 0001 1000 0002 1000 1 1000 2 1000 STARTING No DARK 4 When selecting STAMP SET NUMBERING PAGE NUMBERING or DATE TIME select the desired position from 9 location keys on each screen If fine adjustment is required touch FINE ADJ OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen Touch UP SIDE DOWN SIDE RIGHT SIDE or LEFT SIDE to specify the direction then use the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key to enter the desired amount Fine Adjustment Setting Screen A o The position is moved from base point UP SIDE 15mm LEFT SIDE 10 mm D So er MARK JApplication L Stamp Overlay 2 3 5 6 UP SIDE DOWN SIDE 1 4 So 7 8 j 9 0 LEFT SIDE A v 9 40 Applications Applications Stamp continued 5 Touch CHARACTER SIZE if desired to change the character size The following options are provided STAMP LARGER SMALLER SET NUMBERING 20pt 36pt PAGE NUMBERING 8pt 10pt 12pt 14pt DATE TIME 8pt 10pt 12pt 14pt 6 Touch PRINTED PAGE on the Stamp Selection Set Numbering Type Selection or Date Time Type Selection Screen to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages Touch PRINTED PAGE on the Page Numbering Type Selection Screen to display the Cover Insert Print Setting S
131. B 10 IMAGE QUALITY TextiPhoto ENHANCE SPECIAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL z Ra High mode increase 2 Meeks ES Z Folded Photo A original 600 dpi Text SDF 2 v7 ear CANCEL OK 8 8 Special Original Special Original Special Original continued Mixed Original continued Mixed size originals APS mode Mixed size originals AMS mode ee 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original Screen 2 Touch Mixed Original 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and to return to the Basic Screen 5 Select APS mode to copy each original size to a matching copy size in 1 1 mode or select AMS mode to copy all originals to the same paper size with a ratio selected automatically APS is automatically selected To select AMS touch the tray key on the Basic Screen to select the desired copy size Enter the desired print quantity Position mixed originals FACE UP in the document handler 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 and 5 5 x8 5 mixed or 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 and 5 5 x8 5 mixed When using Platen
132. Book Copy Non Image Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Overlay Basic Screen Basic Screen COUNT SET Align original o STATUS OUTPUT COPY MODE COPY DENSITY LENS MODE TURY FUNCTION COPY SIZE Si EDH fee 100 7 PAPER REI e SPECIAL T 85x11 21b 2 Ms j ORIGINA bite OUTPUT 2 8 5x14 Gah DCS D Gs Sri NORMA ZOOM CAMS i ETZ APPLI GAMS z Pepe S 5x11 5x11 E STAPLE EIS y RE WISS ROTATION 11x17 SORT EEB 1 1 APS STORE APS
133. CANCEL Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note To display menus 11 to 18 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch D Lower arrow key Touch 11 Tray size setting to display the Tray Auto Select Setting Screen On the left half of the screen touch to highlight each tray key then select OFF or ON to specify whether the selected tray is to be automatically detected or not when ATS APS functions Tray keys specified as ATS APS ON will appear on the right half of the screen Touch to highlight the desired tray key then change its priority by using Up A and Down el arrow keys Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 14 38 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Energy Saver Setting 12 Select the interval of time that must elapse before Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off become activated Auto Shut Off conserves more energy than Auto Low Power The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto Shut Off setting Key Operator Mod
134. Consumption Noise Level full system Automatic Modes Di750 Console with stationary platen OPC drum Laser Electrostatic Black cartridge type 50 86 F 10 30 C 10 80 RH Approx 6 min 68 20 C 50 RH Off 30 sec 1 min 1 5 min 2 min 2 5 min 3 min 3 5 min 4 min 4 5 min 5 min From Platen Glass 3 9 sec for 8 5 x11 75 cpm 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 62 cpm 8 5 x11 R 51 cpm 8 5 x14 43 cpm 11 x17 1 9 999 copies 230V AC14 to 10 6 20A Dedicated line recommended 50Hz 60Hz Isolation recommended NEMA Type 6 20R receptacle 250V 2 pole 3 wire grounded Max 3 119 VA full option Approx 78 dB A or less during copying AMS AES plus 9 level manual density APS detects 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice 17 2 Machine Specifications Specifications Magnification Originals on Platen Originals in Document Handler Paper Source Paper Exit Tray Paper Weight Main Body Safety Standard Radio Interference Presets 0 50 0 65 0 77 0 93 1 21 1 29 1 55 2 00 3 User Sets 0 33 4 00 set by key operator Zoom range 0 33 4 00 in 1 steps 0 33 2 00 in 600 dpi mode Max size 11 x17 280mmx432mm ADF mode 1 gt 1 1 gt 2 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Max 100 sheets 20 Ib feed exit capacity EDH mode 2 gt 2 2 gt 1 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Max 1
135. D ke 519999 OUTPUT COPY MODE f COPY DENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION S EDH eet 1 00 A rz A AMS 85x41 5 APPLI E 8 5x11 ZOOM 2 85x14 _ APPLI 4 85x115 2 Sisi hd RE 11x17 E ROTATION bi Gd SORT 1 Basic Operations 6 35 Basic Operations Check Mode and Proof Copy continued 1 Touch the desired copying condition key on the Check Screen to highlight it The dimmed CHANGE SETTING key will become clear NOTES Any key that cannot be highlighted indicates that the copying condition cannot be changed from the Check Screen e Although the following application functions can be highlighted they cannot be changed because the CHANGE SETTING key will be kept dimmed Overlay Non image area erase Reverse image AUTO layout 2 Touch CHANGE SETTING The LCD will display an appropriate screen to change the copying condition selected e Selecting a basic copying condition key will display the Basic Screen e Selecting Enhance key will display the Change Enhance Selection Screen e Selecting Non STD Size key will display the Non STD Size Setting Screen Selecting an application function key will display the Change Application Selection Screen When BOOK MARK has been checked on a subsequent screen selecting the application function key will jump to that screen See p 9 2 for details 3 Change the setting as desired then restore the Check Screen to return to the c
136. E Non STD size Yery High mode oial Tab paper Ei 600 dpi Text SDF L7 RECALL 8 6 Special Original Special Original Text Photo Enhance continued Original Auto mode Photo mode ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE iaj ABODE ABCDE MP ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABGDE Original Auto mode Increase contrast ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE mode ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Original Auto mode Text mode 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original Screen 2 Touch Text Photo or Increase Contrast as required 3 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 4 Select additional copying features as desired 5 Enter print quantity 6 Position original s FACE UP in the document handler or FACE DOWN on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proo copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 7 Press Start After copyi
137. E COPY SIZE FUNCTION K 1 00 aid S Oe ED ea HAT NORMAI zoom P 85x14 Ce SE i APPLI STARE D ag mune esu ROTATION Em ER ER Se 1 Touch the desired mode key on the Basic Screen 1 gt 1 1P 2 21 or 22 A copy mode key will appear dimmed if it is incompatible with other selections made 2 Position originals FACE UP in the document handler as required 3 When all settings are acceptable press Start To cancel the mode touch the desired Copy Mode key on the Basic Screen NOTE When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected remove the copied sets while the paper is exiting otherwise mishandled paper will occur Basic Operations 6 5 Basic Operations Copy Mode continued 1 gt 2 Copy Mode Using Platen Glass When copying in 1 2 mode from the platen glass use the Platen store mode Refer to p 4 2 for details on positioning originals Basic Screen with 12 mode and store mode Rea O CO ke COUNT SET a OUTPUT COPY MODE COPY DENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION USER2 USERL SPECIAL 1 8 5x11 A ANS GEI ORIGINA ance 85x11 NORMAI ZOOM heey H APPLI 4 STAPLE Sal ROTATION SORT OFF 1 Open the document handler 2 Place original FACE DOWN on the platen gl
138. Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 Touch 9 Weekly timer The Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen displays if a code is required Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4 digit Weekly timer master key code then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen See note 2 Select the desired Weekly timer function and make settings as required To exit the Weekly timer mode touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen To exit the Key operator mode touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Key Operator Mode Screen to restore the Basic Screen NOTES 1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered continue by entering the valid A doit code Key Operator Mode 14 29 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Weekly Timer On Off Setting 1 Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Weekly Timer On Off Setting Screen D Weekly timer ON OFF setting Tier setting Timer action ON OFF setting Weekly timer Weekly timer On off Lunch hour off setting Timer interrupt password set PREYIOUS SCREEN CANCEL o a Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 9 Weekly timer Ente
139. GE SETTING Enter by keypad C1 15 ADDITIONAL FUNCTION ps jes EIB JOB 10 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT SheettCover AUTO Ei Insertion a Layout E Reverse All image Chapter Image Area Booklet Cop Insertion Book Copy SE ER Image Shit P IFold Stamp Booklet en DM ER ALL ti 5 ps DELETE SET V 9 8 Applications Applications Chapter continued 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Chapter The Chapter Insertion Setting No Screen will be displayed The 1 2 copy mode is automatically selected 3 Use the keypad on the control panel to enter the page number of each title page 4 Touch SET To clear an incorrect entry touch DELETE or press C The insertion location will be deleted To enter the correct page number touch SET and use keypad 5 Repeat this for each title page number you want to appear on the right hand side When setting more than 15 locations touch the arrow key to move to the next page Be sure to touch SET after each page number entry up to a total of 30 entries Option Touch Booklet on the Chapter Insertion Setting No Screen to use this function To change the selection of paper tray for copying title pages touch Copy Insertion on the screen In this case you can touch CHANGE OF THE INSERTION TRAY to change the currently
140. HE VERTICAL AXIS FIND THE RATIO ON THE TABLE WHERE THESE TWO VALUES MEET The ratio you use must fall within the available magnification range of 0 33 4 00 Use the smaller ratio for reduction and use the larger ratio for enlargement Basic Screen with the popup menu for zoom setting Align original o D COUNT SET STATUS LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION Verti AMS 8 5x11 SPECIAL i THICK Vert i 1 00 i 2 8 5x14 t 0 33 H RECY Horiz SE STORE E 8 511 r APPLI 85x115 ROTATION OFF i 1 First determine the correct ratio as described above 2 Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen to display the popup menu for setting the zoom ratio 3 Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the desired reduction or enlargement ratio in 3 digits or use arrows to scroll to the desired ratio 4 When the desired ratio is specified touch OK to complete the setting To cancel the setting touch ZOOM again select the desired ratio then touch OK 5 Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the document handler as required 6 When all other setting are acceptable press Start Basic Operations 6 13 Basic Operations Lens Mode continued Preset and User Set Ratios Use the Preset and User Set ratios to increase or decrease magnification in fixed amounts If required the eight initially set
141. IOUS GE 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 1 System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen then touch 1 Date amp Time setting to display the Date amp Time Setting Screen 3 Adjust the time The time indicated by the copier is displayed in the upper line and ordered by date month year and time in 24 hour expression In the lower line the highlighted section can be changed by using the keypad on the screen Touch SET to move the highlighted section to the number to be changed 4 To activate the summer time function touch Summer time to highlight it The Present time will gain an hour Touch OK to update the Present time by the Setting time and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen If no further changes are required proceed to step 8 If other system initial settings are required touch desired key Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations o Oo OND Key Operator Mode 14 7 Key Operator Mode System Initial Setting 1 continued Language Select Setting 2 Select the language used in the LCD English O Default setting English
142. IZ WIDTH AAA AA AAAA A AAA aal AAAA Program yer 10mm v AUTO 2 Repeat 4 Repeat 8 Repeat ALL ENTER REPEAT WIDTH d lael sl See cancer sl 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Repeat to display the Repeat Mode Selection Screen Applications 9 27 Applications Repeat Image continued 3 To select the Vertical Horizontal width setting mode 1 Touch Vertical Horizontal 2 Specify the vertical and horizontal widths of the scanning area using up down arrow key from 10 150 mm in 1 mm increments Keep touching the key to increase decrease the value continuously Or touch ENTER REPEAT WIDTH BY KEYPAD to display the popup screen to enter the value from the touch screen keypad Touch Verti Horiz key on the popup screen each time to shift it from one to another Touch OK to restore the Repeat Mode Selection Screen Repeat Mode Selection Screen with popup screen displayed Repea ode se g range 10 0 BOOK JOB 10 MARK J Application L Repeat YERTLIHORIZ WIDTH SETTING ENTER REPEAT WIDTH NN YERTI WIDTH 1 2 3 10mm 4 516 HORIZ WIDTH 7 8 9 SES st 10m Oh O OK ENTER REPEAT WIDTH BY KEYPAD CANCEL To select the Auto detection mode touch AUTO Non image area erase will function automatically To select the Repeat mode touch 2 Repeat 4 Repeat or 8 Repeat as desired 4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 5 Select additional copying featur
143. Image Store Delete Mode continued To Delete Image Data Scanner Server Setting Menu Screen Image Data Password Entry Screen one of follo o SCANNER SERYER Ga image store password 8 A D D K L N u v x 0 1 3 STORCIDELETE CHARACTE CANCEL Job Name Entry Screen Job Name Entry Screen JOB NAME DATE ABCD 1111 2000 11 03 ABCD2222 2000 11 17 EFGH3333 2000 11 19 JOB NAME DATE ABCD 1111 2000 11 03 ABCD2222 2000 11 17 A D E K L D EFGH3333 2000 11 19 u v Y 0 1 4 1 CHARACTER DELETE RETURN TO PASSWORD SCREEN 1 CHARACTE DELETE RETURN TO PASSWORD SCREEN 1 Press Mode to light up the Scanner Server LED The Scanner Server Setting Menu Screen will be displayed 2 Touch IMAGE STORE DELETE The Image Data Password Entry Screen will be displayed 3 Enter your Image data password from the touch screen keypad To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct password 4 If the password is correct touch OK to display the Job Name Entry Screen 5 Touch the A or W key on the right side of the job name list to highlight the data to be deleted then touch JOB DELETE The popup menu will appear to confirm that you delete the selected data 6 Touch YES to delete it or touch NO to cancel The popup menu will disappear 7 Touch RETURN TO PASSWORD SCREEN to restore the Image Data Password Entry Screen 8 Touch CANCEL to restore the Image Data Stor
144. Job Recall Use Job Recall to recall jobs that are already stored in Program Memory Job No Selection Screen ob be f 1 ABC CORPORATION 11 2 12 3 13 4 TEST COPY 9 14 DEF COMPANY 5 10 15 SI Job No Selection Screen Job Recall 1 ABC CORPORATION 6 11 2 7 12 3 OM ke 4 TEST COPY 9 14 DEF COMPANY 5 10 15 Job Recall Check Screen IAL ORIG J Copy Quantity 9999 Exit Tray Main tray Duplex Mode 1 2 EDH Enhance Mode Photo Mode Copy Density TEE Special Orig Z Folded Original Lens Mode 1 00 Original STD size Copy Size 85x11 Paper Type Recycle Selen Staple sort 10 4 Program Memory Program Memory Job Recall continued 1 Place original s as required for the job you are about to recall 2 Press Program Memory to display the Job No Selection Screen See sample screen previous page 3 Touch a Job No key to select a job you want to recall and to highlight the key If required scroll with the arrow keys to reach the desired Job No key 1 30 To cancel the recall mode touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen 4 Touch JOB CHECK The Job Recall Check Screen displays to enable you to review the settings Touching CANCEL on the Job Recall Check Screen returns to the Job No Selection Screen See sample Job Recall Check Screen previous page 5 When the desired Job No key is highlighted touch OK to read the settings of
145. MS only ABCDE e Similarly when size 8 5 x11 copy paper is loaded in the tray in crosswise orientation and the copier detects that the original is placed in lengthwise orientation Rotation if required rotates the original image by 90 and the copy is made with the appropriate AMS ratio to fit the lengthwise style of the copy paper Original Copy paper ABCDE AMS only Basic Operations 6 31 Basic Operations Rotation continued 90 Rotation and AMS continued When the 5 5 x8 5 tray is selected and the copier detects that the original is placed in crosswise orientation Rotation rotates the original image by 90 and the copy is made with the appropriate AMS ratio to fit the crosswise style of the copy paper Original Copy paper Rotation and AM AMS only D 180 Rotation In 1 2 copy mode this function arranges the even pages of the simplex crosswise originals upside down on the reverse side of duplex copies In 2 1 copy mode this function arranges the reverse sides of duplex crosswise originals which read upside down to make normal simplex copies CT 180 Rotation functions when 1 2 or 2 1 copy mode is selected and the originals are placed in the lengthwise orientation O This function is effective for crosswise originals For lengthwise originals this function may not result
146. Mode Screen After this setting a Password Entry Screen will display and require entry of the Key operator password to access the Key Operator Mode Screen ECM Master Key Code Service can set an 8 digit ECM master key code to access the ECM Setting Menu Screen After this setting the ECM Master Key Code Screen will be displayed and will always require entry of the set ECM master key code to access the ECM Setting Menu Screen Weekly Timer Master Key Code Service can set a 4 digit Weekly timer master key code to access the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen After this setting the Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen will be displayed and will always require entry of the set Weekly timer master key code to access the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Weekly Timer Key in Help Screen Service can set the copier with weekly timer system to display the Weekly timer key on the Help Screen to check and see the contents of Weekly timer settings 3 12 Machine Information Machine Information Service Settings continued Control Panel Contrast Key in Help Screen Service can set the copier to display Control panel contrast key on the Help Screen to display the Contrast Adjustment Screen for adjusting panel contrast Staple Sheet Capacity Staple capacity is changeable and may be set to 45 40 or 35 by service Notice Message ADD TONER PM CALL Service can set the copier message area to display ADD TONER when the toner supply is
147. Mode Menu Screen then touch 2 User density level 2 setting to display the User Density Level 2 Setting Screen 3 Place the original on the platen glass or in the EDH 4 Touch Darker or Lighter to select the density level to be programmed 5 Touch No 1 1 4 No 2 5 8 No 3 9 12 No 4 13 16 or Set density then press Start The density level sample sheet will be output 6 Select the desired exposure from the sample sheet s then enter the density level No by using the touch screen keypad 7 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the User Setting Mode Menu Screen 8 If no further changes are required proceed to step 10 9 If other user setting changes are required touch desired key from 1 3 10 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 11 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations Key Operator Mode 14 13 Key Operator Mode User Setting Mode 3 continued User Lens Mode Ratio Setting 3 The preset and userset ratios available on the Basic Screen are used to reduce and enlarge the original image to accommodate copy paper size Normally users are allowed to change the three USERSETs in the bottom line on the User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen The preset keys in the top and middle lines can be programmed in 2 5 DIPSW mode for special purposes but ordinarily it is recommended that they remain unchanged O Setting options Userset or Preset ratio
148. O Default setting USERSET1 4 00 USERSET2 2 00 USERSETS3 0 50 User Setting Mode Menu Screen User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen d d pre 0 1 Juser density level 1 setting PRESET1 PRESET2 PRESET3 PRESET4 User density level 2 setting User lens mode ratio setting 2 00 1 55 1 29 1 21 PRESETS PRESET6 PRESET PRESETS 0 93 0 77 0 65 0 50 USERSET1 USERSET2 f USERSET3 0 50 PREVIOUS See 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 3 User setting mode to display the User Setting Mode Menu Screen then touch 3 User lens mode ratio setting to display the User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen 3 Touch the USERSET you want to change then enter a ratio from 0 33 4 00 using the keypad If a ratio under 0 33 is entered 0 33 will be displayed If a ratio over 4 00 is entered 4 00 will be displayed Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the User Setting Mode Menu Screen If no further changes are required proceed to step 7 If other user setting changes are required touch desired key from 1 8 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations ONO 14 14 Key Operator Mod
149. R ORDER OF PAGINATION Option Press Mode check to view selection and make the Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 10 Touch STORE to deselect the store mode then press Start to print After copying is completed touch Stamp Overlay on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 44 Applications Applications Overlay Memory Use Overlay Memory to scan and store several images in HDD then recall the desired image from the HDD to overlay onto each page copied in the job NOTE Installation of the optional HDD is required Stored overlaying image Scanned originals Copies in OVERLAY MEMORY mode ABCDE gt D O D m p LUH 3 LLL am To Store Overlaying Image Data in HDD The following procedure describes how to store overlaying image data in HDD g Use the platen glass only Cl Copy mode 1 1 mode only g Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions 1 2 2 2 2 1 Changing magnification more than 201 the range of 33 200 is available AMS Reserve Mode Store Mode Selecting Output Mode Setting print quantity Rotation g Incompatible Special Originals Resolution High Very high 600dpi Mixed Original Z Folded Original SDF Tab Paper g Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertio
150. Right 0002 0005 Positions of other stamps WATERMARK NUMBERING SET NUMBERING Application Selection Screen Stamp Overlay Selection Screen ed STAMP OYERLA o BEN J10 MARK fApplication L Stamp Overlay STAMP WATERMARK OYERLAY reen 7 A DA PAGE k NUMBERING WATERMARK Ra OVERLAY mp FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT SheetlCover Transparency pi Non image Wen TE AUTO Insertion Interleave Area Erase Layout Se All image Chapter Image Insert Bh Mer Book Copy BS ES Repeat f Image Shift Sa AA g DATE TIME WATERMARI OYERLAY SET NUMBERING P P Fold Stamp NUMBERIN MEMORY Ss oo Dt ee 2 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Stamp Overlay The Stamp Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed 3 Touch to select the desired stamp to display the subsequent screen On each screen you can specify the desired type of the selected stamp Applications 9 39 Applications Stamp continued Stamp Selection Screen d d o D So er MARK JApplication LStemp Overlay STAMP PRINTING POSITION CHARACTER SIZE FOR YOUR O URGENT TOP SECRET nent LARGER INFORMATION Kies CONFIDENTIAL IMPORTANT PRINTED PAGE DRAFT DO NOT COPY ALL PAGES Set Numbering Type Selection Screen d d BER o p 809k ea and press O MARK J
151. Screen to highlight it then touch OK The copier with TANDEM highlighted will become the primary copier the other copier will function as the secondary copier The Master icon displays on the Basic Screen of the primary copier to indicate that the two units are ready to work in tandem mode NOTE The Sub icon will display on the Basic Screen of the secondary copier when Start is pressed on the primary copier to start the tandem printing operation Tandem Mode 12 3 Tandem Mode Tandem Mode Operation continued NOTE The tandem mode cannot be selected continued in the cases shown below The message Please wait Reserve is not available in Sub machine Sub machine error Please check sub machine or Please check sub machine will be displayed as required The tandem mode cannot be selected while the secondary copier is in the off state due to Auto shut off Press Energy Saver On Off to release it e Selected tandem mode will be released automatically when the secondary copier activates Auto shut off Press Energy Saver On Off to release it then select the tandem mode again to restart the procedure When any problem occurs in the secondary copier such as a paper misfeed or lack of paper the secondary copier will be unavailable for printing however the problem will not cause tandem mode to be released Take the appropriate troubleshooting measures to be ready for copying Tandem printing job cannot be st
152. Stapling amp Folding and Trimming Modes continued CT Incompatible Special Originals with Booklet selected Resolution Very high Mixed Original Non STD size CT Incompatible Applications with Booklet selected Sheet Cover Insertion Combination Transparency Interleave Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat Frame Fold Erasure AUTO Layout Shift mode in Image Shift Overlay CT Incompatible conditions without Booklet Sort Staple sort Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Mixed Original with APS Transparency Interleave Folding Stapling amp Folding Trimming 3 sheets max 16 sheets max ener li Foldi 4S sheets nia whetl Folding and Trimming cua using thick cover paper H Folding Finisher Mode Selection Screen
153. TD size Is i 23 e Se SW i _ special 6 8 A 1 4 Tab paper User H ewen 6 0 Wide paper e When Non STD size is highlighted the popup menu will appear To set the vertical size touch the vertical size key to highlight it then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the vertical size or use arrows to scroll to that number To set the horizontal size touch the horizontal size key to highlight it then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the horizontal size or use arrows to scroll to that number In this case the Special indication and paper type selected will be displayed on the Basic Screen but the actual size information cannot be displayed Basic Operations 6 19 Basic Operations Copy Size continued Selecting Paper Type Size for Multi sheet Bypass Tray continued Paper Type Size Selection Screen JOB 10 TYPE SIZE SELECT SIZE IMAGE POS Thick LI STD size mam Lea D STD size A4W A ei acd special AZW Thin 2 55x85W V Rean ae Tab paper D Fy Non STD size See Wide paper Input size 123mm x 65 mm CANCEL OK Paper Type Size Selection Screen and SIZE SIZE INPUT 2 3 Thick 4 STD size a Ge Thin zid STD size DN aan eene special 5j 6 748 via 1 4 Tab paper Non STD size 65mm 6 0 e When Wide size paper is highlighted the popup menu will appear Use arrows
154. To enter the fold erasure amount touch Fold Erasure then touch FOLD Use the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key to enter the desired amount from 1 30mm Frame Fold Erasure Selection Screen Frame Fold Erasure Selection Screen with Each side selected with FOLD selected LFrame Fold LFrame Fold ae es Sior Os Es EA gee ar aa Gel 1 ee LL fromm mm o LEFT TSN 4 5 6 LEFT RIGHT TECH 4 5 6 A g i en SEE o 7 a 9 t cow 7 8 i 9 OI Omm S a Swe O A v rop EE Swe O A v 4 Touch OK to complete the setting The Application Selection Screen will be displayed 5 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen or make additional application selections 6 Select desired Copy Size 7 Enter desired print quantity 8 Position original s FACE UP in the document handler or FACE DOWN on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 9 Press Start After copying is completed touch Frame Fold Erasure on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine NOTE While copy size and original size generally should be the same it is possible to use Frame Fold Erasure to copy an 11 x17 original to 8 5 x11 R by selecting 0 65 reduction afte
155. Tray or insert blank or copied front and back covers from any tray including the Multi Sheet Bypass Tray e Stamp Overlay Imprint a stamp watermark or scanned image onto the copy image e Staple Select the stapling position and number of staples 3 positions e STD Size Special Detect the standard paper sizes which cannot normally be detected A4R and A5 when loaded in a main body tray A5R and F4 sizes will also be available when loaded in the Multi Sheet Bypass Tray e Tab Paper Copy onto tabbed sheets from tabbed originals allowing the image on the tab part of the original to be printed on the same part of the tabbed copy paper e Tandem Mode for Two Copiers Work in tandem to distribute a large copying job in half the time of non tandem mode e Text Photo Enhance Enhance photo image in Photo mode regular image in Auto mode enhance text image in Text mode enhance lighter image in increase contrast mode e Transparency Interleave Copy onto transparency film and interleave blank or copied paper for each original copied e Trimming mode for FN 4 Finisher with TMG 1 Trimming Unit installed Trim the end of folded or stapled amp folded booklets e Userset Density USERSET 1 USERSET 2 Output up to 16 density samples on a total of 4 pages that display 4 samples per page then program the desired density under USERSET 1 and or USERSET 2 1 10 Introduction Introduction Features of the Di750 continued e Week
156. Use the Check mode to confirm copying selections before pressing the Start key The Check Screen allows you not only to view the current settings but to change or release them directly from the Check mode In this mode use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before copying multiple copies This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of the following copying selections e Copying conditions using Store mode e Booklet e Sheet Cover Insertion e Image Insert e Chapter e Book Copy Combination e Program Job With Proof copy all originals are scanned into memory and only one set is output after you press the Proof Copy key on the control panel or touch Proof Copy key on the Check Screen After Proof copy some copying condition keys may appear dimmed in the Check Screen As to the copying condition indicated on these dimmed keys you cannot change or release the selection When Start key is pressed the job resumes copying until the job is completed g All settings made can be viewed in the Check Screen CT Incompatible Basic Copying Condition with Proof Copy Group CT Incompatible Special Original with Proof Copy Resolution Very high O Incompatible Applications with Proof Copy None Check Screen CHECK MODE BASIC amp SPECIAL ORIG J Copy Quantity 9999 Main tray Cer mi Photo Mode LU Go Density H Z Folded Original Case 1 00 STD size Paper Type Recycl
157. a 321 550 887 386 y xe el T d d gt KE 63 1 if SS 1603 S 47 4 1203 l 1 I I d I I d d D GL LWT Ve voy lt 71 4 a 20 9 gt 72 6 gt 1814 530 1845 le 92 3 2344 Machine Information 3 7 Machine Information Site Requirements continued Unit inches mm 1 Dimensions are in inches with millimeters included in parentheses 2 The Finisher main tray of the FN 104 FN 4 Finisher gradually goes down while printed material is output DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray on the left side of the finisher as any interference may cause damage to the finisher ls f 37 4 L 30 5 4 7 59 44 0 24 6 400 950 ve Ge ae AE Defi 1117 626 y I 63 1 1603 47 4 1203 g WWF VE yy L 104 7 30 3 72 6 2660 en 770 1845 3430 R Di750 FN 4 TMG 1 C 305L NOTES 3 8 Machine Information Machine Information Control Panel Layout Vd EE Copy Scanner Server Co J CR Timer O Printer KH Interrupt Cea ar 000 Energy Saver Proof Copy ai APL OOO s Mode Check Help Program Memory E PanellReset S300 O 1 LCD Touch Screen disp
158. acity of the Secondary sub tray Primary Main tray Staple Sort mode 1 000 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x11 R The maximum capacity varies according to the number of copies to be stapled See p 4 9 Secondary Sub tray Non sort mode 200 sheets max Booklet tray FN 4 only 100 sheets max 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 A4R The maximum number of sheets varies depending on pages of a booklet and selecting either the Folding or the Stapling amp Folding See p 4 10 Trimming unit tray FN 4 with TMG 1 only 512 sheets max 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 A4R The maximum number of sheets varies depending on the number of pages in the booklet and whether Folding or Stapling amp Folding is selected See p 4 11 2 10 Safety Information Safety Information Finisher Capacity Requirements continued A CAUTION FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN BODILY INJURY AND OR MACHINE DAMAGE O FN 4 FINISHER BOOKLET MODE OUTLET Inside the Booklet mode outlet is the roller drive unit DO NOT put your hand into it when removing the folded or stapled amp folded sheet otherwise you may be injured O FN 104 FN 4 FINISHER PAPER EXIT OUTLET To avoid injury when stapling large size copies DO NOT put your hand into the open Paper exit outlet Safety Information 2 11 Safety Information Regulations FCC Regulations WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a C
159. ake the Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 13 Press Start After copying is completed touch Stamp Overlay on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 42 Applications Applications Overlay Use Overlay to scan an image then overlay the image onto each page copied in the job g Scan and store originals into memory g APS and AMS are automatically released O Magnification is initially set to 1 1 This setting is changeable g Original Copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 g Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions None g Incompatible Special Originals Resolution Very high Mixed Original SDF g Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Combination Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Repeat AUTO Layout Reduce amp Shift in Image Shift WATERMARK WATERMARK NUMBERING Overlay Memory ei Originals scanned ies i 4st scanned original GE EEN Copies in OVERLAY mode ABCDE eh Al y Application Selection Screen Stamp Overlay Selection Screen Sie nd
160. al Copy mixed size originals from the document handler in APS or AMS mode APS automatically selects the copy size of each original AMS mode allows you to select one paper size for all originals e Non Image Area Erase When copying from the platen glass when the document cover is open copy only the image area and not the exposed area of glass which would otherwise copy as black e Non STD Size for Multi Sheet Bypass Tray Enter the special paper size to be loaded on the Multi sheet bypass tray using the touch screen keypad in order to avoid paper misfeed Introduction 1 7 Introduction Features of the Di750 continued e Non STD Size for Original Identify the special original size which the Di750 could not detect in order to select the optimal paper size for copying or printing e Output mode for Machine with FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Installed Non Sort Sort Staple Sort and Group modes using the primary main tray Non Sort Face Down exit Non Sort Face Up exit Group Face Down exit and Group Face Up exit modes using the secondary sub tray Stapling amp Folding and Folding modes using the booklet tray FN 4 only Select an output tray and output mode on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen and on the Control panel For details of each output mode see Section 7 Output Modes e Output for Machine with no Finisher Installed Sort and Group modes Use the default condition to output copies in the same order as the originals Use th
161. al Original Resolution Image Quality continued Very High Mode Very High mode is used for high quality photo output CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Using EDH Sort Staple Sort 1 2 2 2 EDH Store Mode Reserve Proof Copy CT Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Z Folded Original CT Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Image insert Repeat Overlay Overlay Memory NOTE When using Program job function selecting High or Very High mode in one JOB will be incompatible with 600dpi in another JOB See p 9 21 to p 9 22 Special Original Screen JOB 10 IMAGE QUALITY Text Photo ENHANCE SPECIAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL High mode incroaso ce e Non STD size C Photo A Tab paper Fi 600 dpi tet E SDF c 7 RECALL 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original Screen 2 Touch Very High mode 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Make other compatible selections 6 Position original s on the platen glass 7 Press Start After copying is comp
162. anagement list print ech Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 2 To display menus 11 to 18 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch EJ Lower arrow key 3 Touch 16 Side 2 lens adjustment to display the Side 2 Lens Adjustment Screen 4 Touch to highlight the desired tray key then touch arrow keys to select an adjustment data The selected data will be displayed on the highlighted tray key Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired item from 1 to 18 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOOO NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password Key Operator Mode 14 47 Key Operator Mode Finisher Adjustment 17 Use this mode to make fine adjustments to each function of the finisher Key Operator Mode Screen 2 Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen d od e of following ite 1 steptings Fotaing stopper saj Folding stopper adjustment Trimming stopper adjustment one of following ite LO Tray size setting Side 2 lens adjustment 12 Energy saver setting 17 Finisher adjustment 13 Memory switch setting HDD management setting Machine ma
163. and then output as needed This function also allows storing the image data in normal copying procedure NOTE Installation of the optional HDD is required Server Function The Server function provides the following three modes Image Store Delete mode Store the image data scanned from originals in HDD or delete the data stored in HDD Image Store amp Output mode Store the scanned image data in HDD after copying is completed Image Recall mode Recall the image data stored in HDD to built in DIMM for printing 11 2 Server Function Server Function Image Store Delete Mode When the original image is stored into DIMM use this function to store the image data into the HDD Or in the event data is already stored in the HDD use this function to delete it from the HDD NOTE Installation of the optional HDD is required for storing data in the HDD To Store Image Data in HDD Specify your password when storing the data in HDD for protection Each image data can be given an alphabetical job name CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions 1 2 2 2 AMS Selecting output mode Selecting copy size APS is automatically selected Setting print quantity Rotation CT Incompatible Special Originals WHOLE AREA in Non STD Size CT Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase
164. and Care Routine Safety Finisher Capacity Requirements Regulations FCC Regulations ICES Regulations Laser Safety Internal Laser Radiation Laser Safety Label Ozone Release Safety Information 2 1 Safety Information User Instructions The following pages include important safety information which should be read and understood before you attempt to operate the machine If you have any concerns about safety matters please contact your service representative Keep this manual permanently located with the machine and in good legible condition The manual should be readily available to all users Machine safety labels are attached to the internal area of the machine The purpose of the safety labels is to alert you of imminent or potentially hazardous situations or conditions Be sure to heed all safety labels If the safety labels become illegible due to soilage etc please contact your service representative for information on obtaining replacements Examples of machine safety labels are shown on the following page The following standard safety categories are commonly used on product labelling A DANGER Danger indicates an imminent hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Note The DANGER category is not required for this product and is included here for general user information A WARNING Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could
165. arger than the size figured out as above the copy result may not be satisfactory CT Incompatible Conditions with Vertical Horizontal Width Setting Mode Basic copying conditions Using EDH Rotation 2 2 2 1 APS AMS Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Special Originals Resolution Very high Mixed Original Z Folded Original SDF Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Non Image Area Erase Reverse Image Frame Fold Erasure AUTO Layout Image Shift Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory CT Incompatible Conditions with Auto Detection Mode Basic copying conditions Using EDH Rotation 2 2 2 1 APS AMS Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Special Originals Resolution Very high Mixed Original Z folded Original SDF Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Reverse Image Frame Fold Erasure AUTO Layout All lmage Area Image Shift Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory 9 26 Applications Applications Repeat Image continued CT Incompatible Conditions with Repeat Mode Basic copying conditions Rotation when magnification is changed from 1 00 APS AMS Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Special Originals Resolution Very high Mixed Original Z folded Original Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Imag
166. arted if 5 reserve jobs not in tandem mode are entered on the secondary copier Wait until the reserve jobs are completed on the secondary copier Selected tandem mode will be released automatically when the primary copier activates Auto low power Auto shut off Press Energy Saver On Off to release Auto shut off if required then select the tandem mode again to restart the procedure 5 Select the desired copying conditions on the primary copier NOTE Ordinary copying operation is still available on the secondary copier during the tandem mode setting 6 Enter print quantity on the primary copier using the keypad When a print quantity amount of 100 is entered the primary and secondary copiers will each copy and output 50 sheets NOTES Print quantity must be set for 3 or more copies to activate the tandem mode e When the print quantity entered is an odd number the primary copier will copy and output one sheet set more than the secondary copier to accommodate the job 7 Position original s FACE UP in the document handler or FACE DOWN on the platen glass of the primary copier 8 Press Start on the control panel of the primary copier The Sub icon will display on the Basic Screen of the secondary copier to indicate that the two copiers will start working in tandem The tandem mode will be released automatically when the tandem mode copying is completed and the Master and Sub icons on each Basic Screen will disappear Tip Enterin
167. ass then close the document handler IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION 3 Touch 1P 2 then make the desired copying selections The STORE key is automatically highlighted on the screen 4 Press Start to scan the original 5 Repeat steps 1 2 and 4 until all originals are scanned 6 Touch STORE to exit the store mode The STORE key will return to the normal display 7 Enter the print quantity using the keypad The quantity entered will be displayed on the upper right message area of the Basic Screen To change the print quantity press C and re enter the correct quantity To delete the scanned data without printing press Stop then touch EXIT on the popup menu to be sure the data is deleted 8 Press Start to print 6 6 Basic Operations Basic Operations Copy Density Automatic Exposure Selection AES AES operates with the initial settings It detects the density of the original image and automatically selects the appropriate exposure for the copy Manual Mode Lighter Normal Darker Select manual copy density to adjust exposure density when originals are too light or too dark Manual adjustments can be made in 9 levels simply by touching the lighter arrow A NORMAL or darker arrow wW key to highlight the desired exposure level indicator Basic Screen COUNT SET STATUS
168. at the location designated on the screen e PAGE NUMBERING prints the page numbers in the specified form over the scanned image at the location designated on the screen e DATE TIME prints the date and time in the specified form over the scanned image at the location designated on the screen e WATERMARK prints the letters selected from 8 options over the scanned image positioning it in the center of the page e WATERMARK NUMBERING repeatedly prints the numbers in the specified form over the scanned image CT All 6 types of stamps can be used in combination CT A watermark is printed obliquely in the center of the page Watermark numbering prints a number repeatedly over the scanned image CT Stamp Set numbering Page numbering and Date Time settings each allow you to select a printing position from 9 locations Stamp Set numbering and Date Time settings each allow you to choose whether to print the stamp on all pages or on the cover only CT Page numbering allows you to choose whether to print on all pages on all pages except the front cover or on all pages except the front and back covers Furthermore with Sheet Cover Insertion or Chapter selected Page numbering allows you to specify the following option COPIED INSERT Prit ON Page number will be printed Print OFF Page number will not be printed but will be counted Skip page Page number will not be printed or counted BLANK INSERT Print OFF Page number will not b
169. atic Rotation ccccccccccccsceeccsseecesseeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeueeeeeaes 6 33 Check Mode and Proof Copy 6 34 Interrupt Made euer E cheek dsc ishagee tia ees E 6 37 Help ModE EE 6 39 Using the Multi Sheet Bypass Tray ccccceceeeeeeeneeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaaeetee 6 41 Section 7 Output Modes FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Specifications seeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeirneseresnrntennsssrrnssrnnsnnnsrrnssnnns 7 2 Non Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray cccccceseeeeeseseeeesecaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeessaeeeneaes 7 5 Sort Mode Using Primary Main Trau 7 6 Staple Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray ccceseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeseaes 7 7 Group Mode Using Primary Main Tra 7 10 Output Modes Using Secondary Sub Tray c ccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 11 Folding Stapling amp Folding and Trimming Modes sesssseeeeeseesssreeeieessrnsssrrserne 7 13 Gover Inserer Ana renneri deae ekana aa eiaa anea ada Siaa eaa Aaaa eaa Aa aE A dEi 7 16 Manual Stapling a aa ee baat a0 eene AE a ida a a aaa 7 18 Output Mode for Machine without Finisher ssssssseeesssesrnssrssssnsssrirsssrnnsrnnnsrrnsssrns 7 20 Face DOWN Ee eege e a dee De E E teil Naas 7 21 See EE 7 24 Section 8 Special Original ee EI Ree Ben EE 8 2 Resolution Image Quality rreraren aeaa a a a a e aa 8 3 PUDDLE e EE 8 3 Very rign Mode aese a a a othanetropitea tite eieeaepetedte 8 4 IEN e
170. atures as required NO COVER SHEET of Booklet is automatically selected To change this selection touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen then touch Booklet twice to display the Booklet Mode Selection Screen to make another selection or to release the setting 6 Enter the desired print quantity 7 Position originals in the document handler When using Store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 29 NOTE When loading originals heed the following limits on capacity Folding Folding and Trimming mode 6 pages or less for simplex copying 12 pages or less for duplex copying Stapling amp Folding Stapling amp Folding and Trimming mode 32 pages or less for simplex copying 64 pages or less for duplex copying Exceeding the above limits on capacity may cause trouble in the finisher 8 Press Start NOTE CLOSE THE TRIMMER STACKER COVER otherwise the machine cannot print copy DO NOT OPEN THE TRIMMER STACKER COVER DURING PRINTING COPYING otherwise the machine will cease operating and a paper misfeed will occur AA CAUTION When the Booklet tray Trimming unit tray capacity is exceeded the finisher will cease operating To avoid such trouble select an appropriate print quantity from the specifications shown on p 7 13 Output Modes 7 15 Output Modes Cover Inserter A The Cover Inserter A is available as an option on the FN 104 FN 4 finisher Load cover sheet paper into this device and use the
171. c Screen 7 24 Output Modes Output Modes Output Mode for Machine without Finisher continued Face Up Exit continued Basic Screen Output Menu Screen Align original on EDH Sek EE OUTPUT OUTPUT MODE f FACE GROUP up ROTATION_ FACE GROUP Z DOWN To Set Face Up Rotation Sort Exit 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Menu Screen 2 Touch FACE UP to highlight it 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 4 Touch SORT to highlight it Basic Screen Output Menu Screen Align original on EDH e ode OUTPUT MODE S Group FACE BS lt fer 4 a m D I v Kai ROTATION_ FACE GROUP DOWN M ah vv Jl 3 To Set Face Up Group Exit 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Menu Screen 2 Touch GROUP and FACE UP to highlight them 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen Output Modes 7 25 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine
172. changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password sous uf Key Operator Mode 14 41 Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 continued The following functions can be provided by the Memory switch settings 1 Panel reset timer Set the reset interval starting from the completion of a copying job until the machine returns to the initial condition 2 Panel Reset key function Set the condition of the following modes when Panel Reset is pressed Copy mode Copy density Magnification Tray selection 3 EDH Original effect Set the machine condition when original is set on EDH in non EDH mode with EDH unit closed 4 Program memory auto recall 30 Program memory No 30 is automatically recalled when power is turned on or when Panel reset is restored This job recall function works only when Job No 30 is registered 5 Finisher mode by Full auto Set the Finisher mode to be recalled when Panel Reset is pressed 6 Initial by Key counter insert Set the machine to return to the initial state when Key counter is inserted 7 Erasure outside area of original Set the machine to delete the outside area of original 8 EDH frame erasure selection Set Frame erasure
173. cific tray is selected the APS key will go out and the AMS key will be highlighted The copy size may require a ratio adjustment When using the EDH with Initial settings a ratio will be selected automatically Tray locations correspond to main body tray 1 2 3 LCC tray 4 and Multi sheet bypass tray Paper types such as Normal Thick 1 Thick 2 Thin TAB PAPER User Recycle Color Special Fine Seal may be specified on some trays by the key operator for information only but paper types cannot be detected by the machine NOTE Do not load paper type other than that specified otherwise machine trouble may be caused g g g g IO a 2 3 When a selected tray is empty an out of paper icon will flash on the tray key along with a message to load paper in the empty tray In 1 2 or 2 2 copying the tray specified as Thick 2 cannot be used If a tray size is changed the tray key on the Basic Screen displays UNIV Touch the UNIV key to display the Universal Tray Size Selection Screen then select the new paper size When the BYPASS key is touched and highlighted the PAPER TYPE SIZE key appears above the BYPASS key Touch the key to display the Paper Type Size Setting Screen then specify the type and size of the special paper to be loaded on the Multi sheet bypass tray Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions with AMS APS Change magnification Incompatible Special Original with AMS None Incompatible Applications with AMS
174. continued E C M Data Edit 1 continued To Add ECM Data 1 Touch Add on the ECM Data Edit Screen The ECM Data Add Screen will be displayed 2 Touch the desired item key to highlight it then enter the data by using the touch screen keypad Password 8 digits max See note 1 Name 8 characters max See note 2 Limit 999 999 copies max NOTES 1 We recommend that you make a list of all ECM passwords and account numbers 2 If an invalid user name is entered continue by the valid name 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and to verify whether the same password or name has been already used for another account No When a password is duplicated The Password Duplication Screen will be displayed Touch YES to re enter new password or NO to create duplicate password NOTE If duplicate password is created the number of copies will be counted only for the ECM password with the smallest No We recommend you do not use duplicate ECM password When a name is duplicated The Name Duplication Screen will be displayed Touch OK to re enter new name To Delete ECM Data 1 Touch A or w key on the right side of the list to highlight the ECM data to be deleted then touch Delete The Delete Confirmation Screen will be displayed 2 Touch YES to delete or NO to cancel To Clear ECM Count 1 Touch A or w key on the right side of the list to highlight the desired ECM data then touch COUNT RESET The Reset Confirmation Scr
175. copying with initial settings or make other selections then press Start Basic Copy Settings Copy mode Copy density Lens mode Copy size Reserve Other Basic Copying Operations Store mode Platen store mode EDH store mode Rotation Check mode and Proof copy Interrupt mode Help mode Using the Multi sheet bypass tray Output Mode with Finisher Special Original Mode Application Selections Server Function Tandem Mode see p 6 4 p 6 6 see p 6 7 p 6 9 see p 6 10 p 6 16 see p 6 17 p 6 20 see p 6 21 p 6 26 see p 6 27 p 6 28 see p 6 29 see p 6 30 p 6 33 see p 6 34 p 6 36 see p 6 37 p 6 38 see p 6 39 p 6 40 see p 6 41 p 6 42 see the Section 7 see the Section 8 see the Section 9 see the Section 11 see the Section 12 NOTE If the Basic Screen displays ADJUSTMENT MODE in the message area this means that the machine was left in the service adjustment mode by a technician If this occurs please contact the technician and request that the mode be turned off otherwise copying may be adversely affected Basic Operations 6 3 Basic Operations Copy Mode Copy Mode Specifications Incompatible functions 1 1 Folding Stapling amp Folding with Booklet Chapter Booklet 1 2 Transparency interleave 2 1 Folding Stapling amp Folding with Booklet Chapter Booklet Repeat AUTO layout Non image area erase Server function 2
176. ction To the User Welcome to the Di750 The following topics relate to general product information and provide tips on using this manual Key Operator Functions Custom settings can be made by the key operator or anyone who is responsible for the machine Access to the Key Operator mode may require a key operator password if previously set by service Use the password system to limit use of key operator functions to a person who is authorized to handle the responsibility Copier Service Repairs amp Supplies Copier service and repairs should be performed only by an authorized service representative To maintain personal safety and to avoid machine damage never disassemble the machine for any reason To ensure optimal copy quality use only supplies that are recommended by us For convenience use the form located at the end of Section 15 Maintenance amp Supplies to record all service repair and supply orders Machine Labels Information labels are affixed to the copier to provide quick and easy instructions on basic copying loading paper adding toner and clearing mishandled paper In addition safety labels are attached to various internal areas of the copier and provide cautionary information that must be heeded to prevent personal injury or damage to the copier Sample machine safety labels are shown in Section 2 Safety Information Control Panel with Interactive Touch Screen The Di750 control panel is user friendly and
177. ction Non Automatic selection Under 8 digits 8 digits Decimal point off 1 STEP 1mm Decimal point on 1 STEP 0 1mm Face up Face down Division of a number of copies During of a number of copies Panel reset timer Complete job 14 40 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 continued No 37 Key click sound No paper JAM OFF 3 seconds 5 seconds 10 seconds No 38 Reserve copy function Reserve copy by folder select Reserve copy by original set No 39 Scan stop by a pull out tray ON OFF No 40 Change page no pos booklet OFF ON Outside page numbering No 41 Trimmer STD Non STD size STD size Non STD size No 42 Timer which prohibits Printer OFF 15 seconds 30 seconds 60 seconds 90 seconds No 43 Bookmark function ON It is cancel every JOB ON It is not cancel every JOB OFF No 44 Side 2 print STD repeat zoom Rotation 180 angle by force Normal No 45 Delete of overlay image Permission Delete Overwrite Prohibition Delete Overwirte Key Operator Mode Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 elect one of following ite LO Tray size setting Side 2 lens adjustment Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment Memory switch setting HDD management setting Machine management list print one of following ite 1 System initial setting 6 Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting m
178. d touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Menu Screen Select to highlight FACE DOWN and deselect all the other keys then touch OK 2 Touch SORT to highlight it Basic Screen Output Menu Screen Align original on EDH e ode OUTPUT MODE Naa FACE EDH GROUP up bes ROTATION_ FACE bo GROUP Z DOWN F Ka kal HDD Sr To Set Face Down Group Exit 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Menu Screen 2 Touch GROUP and FACE DOWN to highlight them 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 7 22 Output Modes Output Modes Output Mode for Machine without Finisher continued Face Down Exit continued Basic Screen Output Menu Screen Align original on EDH 01 OUTPUT OUTPUT MODE f FACE GROUP up E APPLI ROTATION_ FACE GROUP 7 DOWN To Set Face Down Rotation Group Exit 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Menu Screen 2 Touch ROTATION GROUP and FACE DOWN to highlight them 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen Output Modes 7 23 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine without Finisher continued Face Up Exit
179. d it with curl side in proper location Do not exceed the tray capacity COPY IMAGE CAN BE RUBBED OFF Check copy paper thickness Use Thick paper mode if paper weight requires it MAGNIFICATION CANNOT BE CHANGED Image Shift and Reduce amp Shift are incompatible with magnification Press Panel Reset and set desired copying conditions without using Image Shift or Reduce amp Shift DUPLEX MODES CANNOT BE SELECTED Fully close ADU and EDH then select Duplex mode again 16 8 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Copying Hints continued COPYING DOES NOT BEGIN AFTER PRESSING START Insert or adjust the appropriate paper tray for copy size selected Close document cover firmly Close front door completely Check to see if the message Please close stacker cover of Trimmer is displayed Close trimmer stacker cover completely COPYING DOES NOT RESUME AFTER MISHANDLED PAPER IS REMOVED Check copier diagram on touch screen for additional indications of mishandled paper COPY QUALITY IS POOR Check paper for dampness and replace it if necessary THE ORIGINAL PAPER IS MISHANDLED OR SKEWED IN THE DOCUMENT HANDLER Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight Be sure originals are not stapled Align originals evenly in the EDH Check to make sure paper guides meet the width of mixed size originals COPY IMAGE IS SKEWED WHEN BYPASS IS USED Be sure copy paper is inserted straight USING ECM COPIES CANNOT BE M
180. d shift amount available range 0 250mm Keep touching the arrow key to increase or decrease the value continuously The image display on the screen allows you to view the binding margin to be created on the printed sheets The following icons will appear to show the currently selected conditions 6 To set shift amount in Reduce amp Shift 1 Touch FRONT In Reduce amp Shift mode the BOTH SIDES key appears dimmed to show inactivity The message Select magnification ratio on FRONT side will be displayed when BACK is selected first 2 Touch UP SHIFT DOWN SHIFT or RIGHT SHIFT to specify the shift direction In Reduce amp Shift mode the LEFT SHIFT key with FRONT selected appears dimmed to show inactivity Use the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key to select the desired shift amount available range 0 250mm Keep touching the arrow key to increase or decrease the value continuously The AMS will automatically determine the magnification ratio according to the shift amount specified for the front page The shift amount and magnification ratio determined for the front page will be automatically applied to the back page 3 Touch BACK and make direction and amount change if any positioning adjustment is required With BACK selected the magnification ratio will not be changed while the direction and amount can be altered 9 36 Applications Applications Image Shift continued 7 When Booklet or 2 Repeat mode
181. de ech Press the Help button on the Control panel to display the Help Screen 2 Then touch the Key Operator Mode on the Help Screen The Key Operator Password Entry Screen displays when the 4 digit key operator password is set by service Otherwise the Key Operator Mode Screen displays without the password requirement If the Key Operator Password Entry Screen is displayed use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note If the key operator password is not valid check with your service representative To display menus 11 to 18 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch the lower arrow key To return the menu 1 to 10 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch the upper arrow key Make setting changes from the Key Operator Mode Screen as described on the following pages NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password Key Operator Mode 14 3 Key Operator Mode Function Menu Map FUNCTION MENU SUB FUNCTION MENU AND SETTING OPTIONS 1 System initial setting 2 Copier initial setting 3 User setting mode 4 E C M Function setting 6 Paper type Special Size Set 7 Panel contrast Key Sound Adj 8 Key operator data setting 9 Weekly timer 10 Control panel adjustment 11 Tray size setting 1 Date amp Time setting Present
182. dess Line speed System Initial Setting Menu Screen IP Address Setting Screen ect one of following 11_ Date amp Time setting Language select setting IP address 12 123 123 9 1 Subnetmask 12 123 1234 g 4 IP address setting Gateway 2 5 address 12 123 123 9 7 8 0 RESET SET PREYIOUS Line speed Line Speed Setting Screen 10M Half Duplex 100M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Full Duplex Auto Negotiation 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 1 System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen then touch 3 IP address setting to display the IP Address Setting Screen 3 Make the required setting When customizing the line speed touch Line speed setting to display the Line Speed Setting Screen Touch the desired key then touch OK to restore the IP Adress Setting Screen Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen If no further changes are required proceed to step 7 If other system initial settings are required touch desired key Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying op
183. dge lock lever toward the front until it stops then remove the empty toner cartridge Shake the new toner cartridge several times to loosen toner then remove the cartridge protective cap Set the new toner cartridge into the toner unit aligning the hollow part of the cartridge with the arrow on the toner unit Move the toner cartridge lock lever BACK until it stops then return the toner unit to its original position Close the machine front door 13 10 Shortcuts Section 14 Key Operator Mode To the Key Operator How to Access the Key Operator Mode Function Menu Map System Initial Setting 1 Date amp Time Setting 1 Language Select Setting 2 IP Address Setting 3 Copier Initial Setting 2 User Setting Mode 3 User Density Level 1 Setting 1 User Density Level 2 Setting 2 User Lens Mode Ratio Setting 3 ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 How to Access the ECM Setting Mode E C M Data Edit 1 E C M All Count Reset 2 E C M Function Setting 3 Lock Delete Program Memory 5 Paper Type Special Size Set 6 Panel Contrast Key Sound Adjustment 7 Key Operator Data Setting 8 Weekly Timer 9 How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode Weekly Timer On Off Setting 1 Timer Setting 2 Timer Action On Off Setting 3 Lunch Hour Off Setting 4
184. dler or FACE DOWN on the platen glass 8 Press Start After copying is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 8 12 Special Original Section 9 Applications Application Function Menu Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Reverse Image Repeat Image Frame Fold Erasure AUTO Layout Select Application function FILE EDIT All lmage Area SheettCover ei Transparency al S Insertion Interleave Chapter Image Insert Efn Image Sh ift _ Combination BS Book Copy EIS Booklet SH Poe ch raich 7 mp Stam p Overlay Overlay Memory To Store Overlay Image in HDD To Overlay Image Stored in HDD Applications 9 1 Applications Application Function Menu When APPLI key on the Basic Screen is touched the Application Selection Screen displays on the touch panel If one function on the menu is incompatible with another it will appear dimmed The function always dimmed on the screen is now under development When a function key is touched it becomes highlighted If you touch a function key another screen or two will display to enable you to enter the appropriate settings For example you may select Repeat from the Application Selection Screen and
185. down the page Vertical Horizontal Width Setting mode Repeat the selected image area of 10mm 150mm in both vertical and horizontal widths measured from the rear right corner of the 11 x17 original area indicated on the right edge of the platen glass Auto Detection mode Selecting this mode will automatically set the equal repeat area to the size of the original placed onto the platen glass by activating Non image area erase Repeat mode Select the repeating times of the original to be arranged in one copy sheet Vertical Horizontal Width Setting Mode Specifications Use the platen glass Document handler cannot be used Repeat width 10 150mm in 1mm increments Copy mode 1 1 mode only When selecting 1 2 mode Platen store mode will function automatically g Auto Detection Mode Specifications Use the platen glass Non Image Area Erase will function automatically Scanning area 11 x17 10mm x 10mm Repeat image area Original image area detected by Non Image Area Erase Copy mode 1 1 mode only When selecting 1 2 mode Platen store mode will function automatically Repeat Mode Specifications Magnification ratio Set to 1 00 100 automatically Magnification can be changed however Rotation will not function when changed Scanning area 11 x17 10mm x 10mm Repeat image area A portion of the selected copy size equally divided according to the mode 2 4 or 8 Repeat designated on the screen If detected image size is l
186. e Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 This function can only be accessed by the key operator after a 8 digit ECM master key code is entered The Electronic Copy Monitor allows you to monitor all copying activity by controlling ECM password accounts This feature can track copier usage for individual users and or accounts as well as limit access to the copier to authorized users Copy quantity limits for specific accounts can also be set Use the ECM Key Operator Form provided at the end of this section to record ECM password information The ECM stores up to 1 000 ECM passwords each of which represents a separate account that can be used for billing and recordkeeping The number of users assigned to each account may depend upon the billing system in operation and the number of individuals and departments using the copier When the ECM is activated copying can be performed only after a valid ECM password is entered Copy quantity and copy limit for each account can be visually confirmed on the screen If ECM needs to be activated on your machine contact your service representative The following ECM settings can be made 1 E C M data edit Change add or delete ECM data and reset the copy count of the individual account 2 E C M all count reset Clear the copy count for all accounts 3 E C M function setting Select the ECM function to be on or off and also set the machine condition when
187. e re a ROTATION OFF STORE el NOTES 1 The APPLI key on the Basic Screen will be highlighted when application selections have been made 2 When incompatible selections are made the last key touched will be selected 3 To cancel individual functions in application mode touch the highlighted key To cancel all application selections touch ALL CLEAR key on the Application Selection Screen 9 2 Applications Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Use Sheet Cover Insertion in copy mode or blank mode to insert chapter sheets or separator sheets into the finished set as well as front and back covers Specifications for Sheet Cover Insertion Scan and store originals into memory then print all the pages collectively Max insert sheets 30 locations from 1 250 including front and back covers Original paper 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 13 Ib 34 Ib AMS Automatic Magnification Selection Functions when a different copy size is selected Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions APS Group Folding Stapling amp Folding Trimming with Booklet Rotation Sort Rotation Group Incompatible Special Originals Resolution Very high Mixed Original SDF Tab Paper Incompatible Applications Co
188. e _Gutput Mode AFA Staple Sort PROOF RF eer Proof Copy key You cannot change the selection if the copying condition key appears dimmed 6 34 Basic Operations Basic Operations Check Mode and Proof Copy continued 1 Press Mode Check on the control panel to display the Check Screen 2 Verify the settings made for the current job 3 If necessary press Proof Copy on the control panel or touch Proof Copy on the Check Screen to output a set of sample copy If only one copied set is needed and the sample set is adequate press Stop to delete the stored data 4 Touch EXIT or press Mode Check to exit from the Check mode and return to the Basic Screen 5 Press Start when the Basic Screen is displayed If set quantity is two or more the copier will output the rest except the sample sets Change Release Settings If you want to change or release any settings follow the procedure below To change the settings Check Screen CHECK MODE BASIC amp SPECIAL ORIG 1 Copy Quantity 9999 Cexit Tray Main tray Duplex Mode 1 2 EDH Enhance Mode Photo Mode Copy Density Be Special Orig Z Folded Original Cisne fede 1 00 origina st size Copy Size A4 B4 A4 Paper Type Recycle OHP Output Mode Staple Sort CHANGE RELEASE PROOF EXIT SETTING J SETTING COPY Basic Screen Align original o
189. e 400dpi e All lmage Area Make copies printed completely to the edges to avoid image loss e AES Automatic Exposure Selection Automatically adjust exposure to compensate for the original e AMS Automatic Magnification Selection Automatically select an appropriate magnification ratio when Copy Size is selected manually Automatically selected when AMS key is touched e APS Automatic Paper Selection Automatically select copy paper size to match the original documents e ATS Automatic Tray Switching Automatically switch tray to allow copying to be continued without interruption when the selected tray becomes empty while copying is in progress e Auto Layout The original image on the platen glass or in the document handler is copied and centered on a sheet e Auto Low Power Automatically lower the power after a specified period of copier inactivity e Auto Shut Off Automatically shut off the main power after a specified period of copier inactivity e Book Copy Copy both pages of an open book or book size sheet separately onto two letter sheets in 1 1 mode or separately onto each side of one letter sheet in 1 2 mode You can use the Book Copy mode with the Front or Front Back cover mode The cover page s will be scanned and copied normally before image division is performed on the other pages e Booklet Create letter R or ledger size booklets from letter size originals in 1 2 or 2 2 copy mode e Chapter Start chapter
190. e Sort mode to alternately switch the horizontal and vertical orientation of each copied set upon exit Use the Group mode to output multiple copies of each original without offsetting them upon exit e Output mode for FN 104 FN 4 Finisher with Cover Inserter A Installed Cover Sheet mode Manual Staple mode For details of each output mode see Section 7 Output Modes e Overlay Memory Store the overlaying image in HDD and print a stored image onto the copy image e Panel Reset Automatically reset to auto mode defaults after a specified period of copier inactivity e Paper Capacity Total 2 150 sheets including two 500 sheet trays a 1 000 sheet tray and a 150 sheet Multi Sheet Bypass tray Total 6 150 sheets including 4 000 sheet optional large capacity cassette e Platen Memory Scan documents into memory from the platen glass and or the document handler and insert the pages into another document copied from the document handler If an incompatible function is selected in this mode the latter function will not be selected and a Caution message will be displayed 1 8 Introduction Introduction Features of the Di750 continued e Program Job Scan documents into memory while designating a different copy condition for each original then print all the images collectively e Program Memory Program up to 30 jobs and Recall each job by job number as needed All compatible platen glass functions can be programmed into Progra
191. e Delete Site Selection Screen 9 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Scanner Server Setting Menu Screen 10Press Mode to light up the Copy LED The Basic Screen will be displayed 11 6 Server Function Server Function Image Store amp Output Mode Use this function to store the scanned image data in HDD after copying is completed This storing function does not conflict with any other copying conditions NOTE Installation of the optional HDD is required for this function With the HDD installed the HDD STORE key will be displayed on the Output Menu Screen Output Menu Screen with Finisher Output Menu Screen without Finisher JOB 10 aple position displayed as the placed origina EXIT TRAY STAPLE lt 1POS gt 1 STAPLE lt 2POS gt OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt OUTPUT MODE s f TAT f cover sue ail 2 Al A SROUE SHEET TRAY FACE lal A sort T as i STAPLING S H ROTATION_ FACE Gen SR NW V ki Vv amp FOLDING EIS SE EN TRAY ie Gos Coe HDD RECALL HDD TORE STANDARD _CANCEL ok STORE Image Data Password Entry Screen Job Name Entry Screen JOB NAME DATE ABCD1111 2000 11 03 ABCD2222 2000 11 17 EFGH3333 2000 11 19 Image store password 8
192. e Down exit mode manual stapling mode 8 Non sort Face Up exit mode r de e Group Face Down exit mode Primary main tray Group Face Up exit mode Mes Manual staple control panel Holds sets ejected in E Srel Finisherdoor Sort mode offset va hs fh Inisner ONS Staple sort mode G Gun mode offset J Booklet mode outlet FN 4 only G ejects finished copied sets when selecting D Folding mode or Stapling amp Folding mode LCC top door opens to load paper Booklet tray FN 4 only Large Capacity Cassette details EI C 305 Paper guides style hold copy paper to fix its position Bottom plate of the LCC goes up automatically when paper LCC left side door supply becomes low and goes opens to allow removal of down when the paper loading mishandled paper button is pressed LCC lever can be moved downward to ease eA removal of mishandled paper C 305L style l Paper loading button Rear stopper is pressed to lower the bottom fixes the rear end of plate to allow loading paper copy paper LC 305L style Machine Information 3 5 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued Optional Equipment continued TMG 1 Trimming Unit details Trimmer stacker cover opens to allow you to take out the finished sets Trimming unit tray slides to the left side each time a trimmed booklet is delivered Trimming un
193. e Insert Book Copy Non image Area Erase Reverse Image Frame Fold Erasure AUTO Layout Image Shift with 4 8 Repeat Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory NOTE The Auto Detection and Repeat mode of the Repeat image function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass In this case consult your service representative about an appropriate place for installation Vertical Horizontal Width Setting mode Horiz width Verti width ABCDE 5 AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB Auto Detection Repeat mode ABCD Original Original Copy Copy AUTO ABCD ABCD Copy 2 Repeat ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD Copy 4 Repeat ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD Copy 8 Repeat Application Selection Screen Repeat Mode Selection Screen Repeat mode setting range 10 150mm 08 10 p MARK fapprication FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT S etc E YERTLIHORIZ WIDTH SETTING AUTO DETECTION REPEAT VERT WD TH A x A A A Al image 10 Area mn Ki A Ge Repeat Ba HOR
194. e Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 LO Tray size setting Side 2 lens adjustment Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment Memory switch setting HDD management setting Machine management list print PREVIOUS SCREEN Energy Saver Setting Screen 1 System initial setting Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting ECM function setting Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment Auto Low power Auto Shut off 15 min 60min zomin 60min 90 min 120min 240 min bait 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 To display menus 11 to 18 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch D Lower arrow key 3 Touch 12 Energy saver setting to display the Energy Saver Setting Screen 4 The periods of time currently selected for each energy saver function are located on the Timer Setting Screen below the Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off indicators Touch the arrow keys A and Y in each area to select a specific waiting period before activating the Auto Low Power or Auto Shut Off NOTES 1 The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto Shut Off setting
195. e p 14 24 p 14 25 Total Paper Capacity 6 150 sheets including three Main body trays and 150 sheet Multi Sheet Bypass Tray Tray 4 LCC 4 000 sheets 20 Ib fixed to standard wide size 8 5 x11 W or A4 W NOTE Reliability and copy quality are not guaranteed for all Special papers Use only paper that is recommended by us Paper Information 4 7 Paper Information Paper in Large Capacity Cassette C 305L Option Standard Paper Size 11 x17 F4 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R A3 B4 A4 A4R service adjustable Wide Paper Size gt 11 x17 W F4W 8 5 x14 W 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 WR A3W B4aw A4W A4WR service adjustable Paper Weight 16 24 Ib LCC specified in Thick 1 25 45 Ib LCC specified in Thick 2 46 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper 1 1 or 2 1 copying only NOTE Paper type setting Thick 1 or Thick 2 for LCC can be made in the Key operator mode See p 14 24 p 14 25 Total Paper Capacity 6 150 sheets including three Main body trays and 150 sheet Multi Sheet Bypass Tray Tray 4 LCC 4 000 sheets 20 ID fixed to standard wide size 11 x17 W F4 W 8 5 x14 W 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 R W A3 W B4 W A4 W or A4R W Paper in Automatic Duplex Unit Standard Paper Size 11 x17 5 5 x8 5 Wide Paper Size 11 x17 W 5 5 x8 5 W NOTE 5 5 x8 5 W copy paper is available in crosswise orientation feeding only Paper Weight 16 45 Ib Paper in Multi Sheet Bypass Tray Loading Paper Size Max 12 36 x17 52 314mm x
196. e printed but will be counted Skip page Page number will not be printed or counted CT When Chapter is already selected Set numbering Page numbering and Watermark numbering each allow you to print chapter number on each chapter page in addition to each numbering function When used in duplex copying specified right left printing position will be automatically reversed on back pages When used in duplex copying and top bottom staple position is selected specified top bottom printing position will be automatically reversed on back pages Image cutoff width leading end 5mm trailing end 4mm top and bottom 2mm 9 38 Applications Applications Stamp continued CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Tandem mode with NUMBERING and WATERMARK NUMBERING CT Incompatible Special Originals Resolution Very high CT Incompatible Applications Combination Reverse image Repeat except 2 4 8 Repeat Overlay with WATERMARK and WATERMARK NUMBERING Overlay Memory NOTE STAMP and WATERMARK are available only with HDD installed in the machine Without HDD these function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity Top Left T Middle T Right TOP SECRET Cy ky Dp STAMP 00 10 10 10 30AM Middle Left Middle M4Right WATERMARK EJ C Cip DATE TIME 0001 1000 2 5 0001 1000 0001 1000 0001 1000 d ee Ch PAGE NUMBERING 0001 1000 0001 1000 Lower Left L Middle L
197. ea Erase continued General copying Set original Non Image Area Erase Application Selection Screen FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Transparency Non image HEH AUTO Interleave E Area Erase Lal Il Layout jA A Al Book Copy Ei ES Repeat K Image Shift Program FrameiFold ff Stamp Job D ll Sieg OU 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Non image Area Erase 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Enter print quantity 6 Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass IMPORTANT KEEP THE DOCUMENT HANDLER OPEN THROUGHOUT THE PROCEDURE When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 7 Press Start After copying is completed touch Non image Area Erase on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 24 Applications Applications Reverse Image Use Reverse image to reverse the image from black on white to white on black and vice versa CT Original Copy paper 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Folding Sta
198. eaeaeeees 13 5 ae EA E tactecestatiit E satin tweet ane reef ethed ach A 13 5 leien ET 13 6 Program JOD EE 13 6 Non Image Area Erase een 13 6 En e TEEN 13 7 Ee gll EE 13 7 Frame Fold Erasure sn eegen fvetenteeeevatesievvigietaied E es 13 7 AUTO Eayoul aras erence ne rrr tcercechcrrercretec etree a reer ceercrc e er rece 13 8 Allelmage Area EE 13 8 Image Shift Reduce amp Shift eecceececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseeeeeesaeeeseeeeeessaeessaas 13 8 Stamp OVER EE 13 9 LOAGING BS 13 10 ele ate WE LEE 13 10 Section 14 Key Operator Mode To the Key OperatOr kismina aa aa aaa oaaae aa i ads 14 2 How to Access the Key Operator Mode esssssseeessseessirsssrrssrerssrinsssrrnssrrnnsrnn 14 3 Function Menu Map EE 14 4 System Initial Setting D 14 7 Date A Time Setting Til 14 7 Language Select Setting 93 14 8 IP Address Setting B miia tuen wie in nition ened aa a 14 9 Copier Initial Setting II 14 10 User Setting Mode S rrei niniin ae eaae dined asa Viae 14 12 User Density Level 1 Setting fl 14 12 User Density Level 2 Setting 9 14 13 User Lens Mode Ratio Setting DI 14 14 Contents Section 14 Key Operator Mode continued ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting Ja 14 15 How to Access the ECM Setting Mode 0 cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeseaeeeees 14 16 E G Mi Dataset Cegedel 14 17 E C M All Count Reset 2 14 21 E C M Function Setting 3 14 22 Lock Delete Program Memo
199. easy to operate The far right portion of the panel displays the Timer indicator and buttons to select Energy Saver Interrupt Proof Copy and Stop Adjacent to this section is the keypad to select Print Quantity Utility and Clear The next section on the left displays the Copy Scanner Server Printer indicator and keys to select the mode as well as keys to select Mode Check Help Program Memory and Panel Reset modes To the left is the LCD screen Copying modes selections and setting changes can be made from the touch screen The upper portion of the touch panel automatically displays machine status information as required In addition the Help key can be used to display information on each function that is displayed on the screen and provide step by step instructions 1 2 Introduction Introduction To the User continued Overview of the Operator s Manual To enjoy optimal performance read this manual before using the copier Be sure to handle the machine and perform all copying operations only as recommended in the manual Keep the manual located with the machine so that all users may refer to it as needed Manual Organization This manual includes fifteen topic sections and Specifications of the product Highlights are as follows Section 1 includes general product information and features Section 2 provides all safety information which should be read before operating this equipment Section 3 includes machine informatio
200. ebe E Eege A uate aanene 8 5 Text Photo Ebene orereta eiiiai iaaii ANE EAT ees i Daa 8 6 ee E Bel aTe ET 8 8 Mixed eine UN EE 8 8 Z Kolded MO gle E EE 8 10 SDF Single Document Feed ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeseeeeeesaeeessaeeesenes 8 11 Origival TEE 8 12 Contents Section 9 Applications Application Function Menu 0 eeeecceceeeeeeecneee eee eecne eee e eee taeeeeeeeetaaeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeetiaeeeeeeneaa 9 2 Sheet Cover Insertion ccccccececceeesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeaeeeseaaaeescaeeseeaaaeessaeeseeeeeeeseaeeneeees 9 3 EN e EE 9 8 COMBINATION EE 9 10 BOOKIE Seu ege er aes foci en eege eege EENS EES 9 12 Transparency Interleave critieria nriran AA A EACE Adiada 9 15 image TE ET 9 17 BOOK COPY E E 9 19 PROQKAM JOD WEE 9 21 Non Image Area Erase een 9 23 Reverso Mage ET 9 25 ellene EE 9 26 Frame Fold Erasure ees i a ERE EAE E dagehiceata aia hcneatadeh dseastacelateeanbenad tees 9 29 AR Me 9 31 All lmage Arga eege NENNEN EE dean dited sane ANET AEE NE A ide duitee dened 9 33 Image Shiftess iio tts Mie hitter Ate et le a 9 34 SUID EE 9 38 ONLIE ER 9 43 Overlay OT 9 45 To store Overlay Image in HDD eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeteaaeeee 9 45 To Overlay Image Stored in HDD 9 48 Section 10 Program Memory ee 10 2 ee 10 4 Program Memory deelt 10 6 Section 11 Server Function DELVE le sox e 3 A E apes eaiest cetande asaubiaeetiatas A AAE 11 2 Image Store De
201. ed See p 14 40 p 14 45 CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Reserve CT Incompatible Special Original None CT Incompatible Applications Storing image in Overlay Memory Control Panel Basic Screen Press START to scan originals Align original on EDH unit S Interrupt S nterrupi SGG SSNS STATUS OUTPUT COPY MODE COPY DENSITY LENS MODE COPY S
202. ed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration of the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS This means that the device does not produces hazardous laser radiation The label shown on page 2 16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure This is a semiconductor laser The maximum power of the laser diode is 20 mW and the wavelength is 665 695 nm For European Users CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure This is a semiconductor laser The maximum power of the laser diode is 20 mW and the wavelength is 665 695 nm For Denmark Users ADVARSEL Usynlig laserstraling ved abning nar sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion Undga uds ttelse for str ling Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene Dansk Dette er en halvlederlaser Laserdiodens h jeste styrke er 20 mW og b lgel ngden er 665 695 nm 2 14 Safety Information Safety Information Regulations continued For Finland Sweden Users LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS Laittee
203. ed on your machine to be sure it is recommended by us If necessary check with your representative Never use cleaning materials for purposes other than cleaning and be sure to keep all cleaning materials out of the reach of children or anyone who is incapable of using them safely O ENERGY SAVER Use Energy Saver mode for short periods of machine inactivity When not using the machine for long periods of time turn power off except when the weekly timer function is operating DISPOSAL OF THE COPIER Dispose of this copier according to your local regulations Safety Information 2 9 Safety Information Finisher Capacity Requirements A CAUTION FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN BODILY INJURY AND OR MACHINE DAMAGE FINISHER PAPER CAPACITY To prevent paper misfeed do not exceed the paper capacity of the Finisher FN 104 FN 4 Finisher paper weight 16 Ib 24 Ib When the selected print quantity exceeds the maximum paper capacity remove the copied sheets from the finisher while the paper is exiting Paper capacities below are stated for 20 lb Bond or the same size This Finisher also accepts wide types of the regular sizes stated below Finisher FN 104 FN 4 Primary Main tray Non sort Sort Group mode 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 R 3 000 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 1 500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 The Secondary sub tray can be unloaded while the Di750 is running Set production is not limited by the cap
204. ed plug is loose in the socket disconnect it and consult an electrician for repair but do not attempt to operate the machine For plug cable equipment that the socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible A damaged power cord may result in overheating short circuit or fire Do not bend crush wind or kick the cord or strike it with a desk or any item or roll up the power cord If the main body power cord is bent or damaged immediately contact your service representative and do not attempt to repair it yourself or continue to operate the machine ADAPTERS AND PLURAL LOADS Never use adapters and never connect plural loads or a branched socket to one socket outlet otherwise an accident may occur from overheating or fire EXTENSION CORDS LEADS An extension cord or lead is limited in capacity Unless the cord or lead has adequate capacity smoking may occur and an accident may be caused from overheating Should smoking and or overheating occur contact an electrician immediately If you require further information about power requirements power consumption extension cords adapters and connectors please contact your service representative and also consult your electrician Safety Information 2 7 Safety Information Machine Handling and Care A WARNING FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING WARNING MAY RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY AND OR MACHINE DAMAGE MACHINE CONTACT
205. een Low Power Mode Press any key to cancel Align original on EDH unit ORIGINAL COUNT pg status OUTPUT COPY MODE Y SIZE FUNCTION z EDH YES NO SPECIAL 2 2 San ORIGINAL D HAT Sri ornai zoom IT 83x14 Ch ere ESCH x115 STARE IS v RE WSL 1 Ree Release Manual Low Power Press any key on the control panel The Manual low power will be released and the LCD screen recovers usual brightness Copier Management 5 3 Copier Management Energy Saver Mode continued Auto Shut Off This function automatically shuts off the main power after a specified period of copier inactivity The Auto shut off can be set for 30 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes 120 minutes 240 minutes Initially Auto shut off is set to function after 90 minutes of copier inactivity For the key operator setting see p 14 39 Release Auto Shut Off Press Energy Saver On Off The copying operation will be available Manual Shut Off Press Energy Saver On Off The Shut Off Setting Screen will be d
206. een will be displayed 2 Touch YES to clear the copy count of the selected ECM data or NO to cancel Delete Confirmation Screen Reset Confirmation Screen NO NAME COUNTILIMIT NO NAME COUNTILIMIT 1000 2KC56 012345 1000 2KC56 012345 SET SET COUNT PREYIOUS COUNT PREYIOUS RESET SCREEN RESET SCREEN Key Operator Mode 14 19 Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 continued E C M Data Edit 1 continued 5 If other ECM setting changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the ECM Data Edit Screen to return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen Touch desired key from 1 3 6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 7 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations 14 20 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 continued E C M All Count Reset 2 Rese
207. el Reset Mode Automatic Paper Selection APS Automatic Magnification Selection AMS Automatic Exposure Selection AES Automatic Tray Switching ATS Lead Edge Delete Service Settings Finisher Paper Capacity Key Operator Password ECM Master Key Code Weekly Timer Master Key Code Weekly Timer Key in Help Screen Control Panel Contrast Key in Help Screen Staple Sheet Capacity Notice Message ADD TONER PM CALL Machine Information 3 1 Machine Information Machine Configuration External Machine LCD touch screen Control panel QEDH Work table DFN 104 FN 4 Finisher option Multi sheet ee bypass tray ee a LCC top door Power switch MERT Ee S q Left side cover Ly Ze es a not shown fos S Front door toa EE G ss P SE Left door ee a dO Tray 1 N A p Tray 2 Otray 3 Sell Tray 4 Large Right side door not shown LCC left capacity cassette side door C 305 option Trimmer stacker cover 3 TMG 1 Trimming unit option AML LCC left side door e Tray 4 Large capacity cassette C 305L option 3 2 Machine Information Machine Information Machine Configuration continued External Machine Call outs 1 oN Oo P WO ND 10 EDH Electronic Document Handler automatically feeds multiple originals one
208. election Screen e When selecting the COVER PRINT SETTING touch Front amp Back Print ON Front Print OFF and Back Print ON or Front amp Back Print OFF e When selecting the INSERT PRINT SETTING touch Print ON Print OFF or Skip page as provided for each of copied insert and blank insert Touch OK to return to the Page Numbering Type Selection Screen You will find that the screen reflects the selection you made Page Numbering Type Selection Screen Cover Insert Print Setting Selection Screen with INSERT PRINT SETTING selected L Stamp Overlay COPIED INSERT _ PRINT OFF BLANKINSERT SKIP PAGE L Stamp Overlay COYER PRINT SETTING INSERT PRINT SETTING CHARACTER PAGE NUMBERING PRINTING POSITION COPIED INSERT BLANK INSERT Front amp Back Print ON Det P1 P2 P3 1 5 2 5 3 5 scald Print ON Print OFF PRINTED PAGE Pri Pri FRONT amp BACK E TE 23 T Front Print OFF and Back Print ON PRINT ON 1 2 3 15 3 5225 F LEF nen Print OFF Skip page STARTING No Front amp Back Print OFF 1 1 1 2 1 3 owen 1 LEFT FINE ADJ OF CHARACTER PRINTED INE ADS Gi RINTE STARTING No CANCEL ok GN Skip page 7 Touch STARTING No on the Set Numbering Page Numbering or Watermark Numbering Type Selection Screen to display the Starting No Setting Screen Use the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key to enter the desired starting number then touch OK to return to the previous
209. emory 90 Rotation and APS In APS the copier automatically copies onto the same paper size as the original s in 1 1 For example when size 8 5 x11 copy paper is loaded in the tray in lengthwise orientation and the copier detects that the original is placed in crosswise orientation Rotation and APS function together to rotate the original image by 90 and output the 8 5 x11 copy to match the direction of the copy paper Original Copy paper Rotation and APS ABCDE TE APS cannot be used alone Similarly when size 8 5 x11 copy paper is loaded in the tray in crosswise orientation and the copier detects that the original is placed in lengthwise orientation Rotation and APS function together to rotate the original image by 90 and output the 8 5 x11 copy to match the direction of the copy paper Original Copy paper Rotation and APS ABCDE APS cannot be used alone 6 30 Basic Operations Basic Operations Rotation continued 90 Rotation and AMS For example when size 8 5 x11 copy paper is loaded in the tray in lengthwise orientation and the copier detects that the original is placed in crosswise orientation Rotation if required rotates the original image by 90 and the copy is made with the appropriate AMS ratio to fit the crosswise style of the copy paper Original Copy paper Rotation and AMS A
210. en To cancel the setting touch RE again then select the desired ratio 3 Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the document handler as required 4 When all settings are acceptable press Start 6 14 Basic Operations Basic Operations Lens Mode continued Zoom Mode Use the Zoom mode to reduce or enlarge the copied original image in 1 increments O Zoom range 0 33 4 00 0 33 2 00 in 600 dpi mode and Storing image in Overlay Memory 0 33 4 00 in Resolution very high Basic Screen with the popup menu for zoom setting Align original o D ke COUNTZSET L STATUS FUNCTION LENS MODE COPY SIZE SPECIAL 1 8 5x11 Thick E ORIGINA E 8 511 APPLI 4 85x115 ROTATION OFF i 2 8 5x14 RECY STORE 1 Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen to display the popup menu for setting the zoom ratio 2 Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter a 3 digit Zoom ratio or use arrows to scroll to the desired ratio 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen To cancel the setting touch ZOOM again select the desired ratio then touch OK 4 Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the document handler as required 5 When all settings are acceptable press Start Basic Operations 6 15 Basic Operations Lens Mode continued Vertical Ho
211. en Select 1 2 or 2 2 copy mode To release AMS default select magnification and copy size Touch OUTPUT APPLI to select folding or stapling amp folding if the FN 4 Finisher is installed or to select trimming if the TMG 1 Trimming unit is installed Touch OK to restore the Basic screen then enter the print quantity amount Position letter size originals face up on the EDH document handler tray in crosswise orientation Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine 13 4 Shortcuts Shortcuts Transparency Interleave p 9 15 OO E ob OO JO 10 First load the same size copy paper as the transparencies in any regular tray Insert one transparency sheet at a time into the Multi sheet bypass tray Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch Transparency Interleave to display the Transparency interleave screen Touch Blank Sheet Interleaving or Copy Sheet Interleaving unless your choice is already highlighted Touch OK to return to the Application selection screen Make additional selections Touch OK to return to the Basic screen with the required print quantity of 1 automatically selected Position the original face up on the EDH document handler tray or face down on the platen glass Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine Image Insert p 9 17 1 oR OP oO 10 12 In preparation note the pa
212. ent month are displayed on the left half of the screen with timer active days highlighted To activate or deactivate the Timer for any individual day touch the key for that day to change its indication To change the month use arrows to scroll to the desired month Key Operator Mode 14 33 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Timer Action On Off Setting 3 continued 5 To collectively set the on off data for the entire month by the day of the week touch the ON or OFF key for the desired day on the right half of the screen If you touch an already highlighted key no change will occur 6 If any change is made in the collective setting area the Timer Action Change Confirmation Screen will be displayed Touch YES to change the timer action or touch NO to cancel The Timer Action On Off Setting Screen will be restored 7 Touch OK on the Timer Action On Off Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen 8 If other Weekly timer settings are required select another desired menu item from 1 5 9 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 10 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations 14 34 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Lunch Hour Off Setting 4
213. er sizes in addition to the standard sizes described below See p 4 9 p 4 10 Finisher Type CT Primary Main Tray with built in 2 stapling moving tray type Secondary Sub Tray Booklet Tray Cover Inserter A option Trimming Unit TMG 1 option FN 4 Finisher only Primary Main Tray e Non Sort Mode O Paper size 11 x17 5 5 x8 5 CT Paper weight 16 24 lb Special stock 65 Ib 176 g m cover paper transparency film labels hole punch rag content CT Paper capacity for 20 Ib 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 3 000 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 1 500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 e Sort Mode Group Mode O Paper size 11 x17 5 5 x8 5 O Paper weight 16 24 Ib CT Paper capacity for 20 Ib 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 3 000 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 1 500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 e Staple Sort Mode O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 CT Paper weight 16 24 Ib Paper capacity for 20 Ib 1 000 sheets CT Staple capacity 50 sheets 5 0mm thick or less CT Staple position See p 7 7 NOTES 1 Variable according to the number of pages to be stapled See p 4 9 for detail 2 Staple sheet capacity is changeable and may be set to 45 40 or 35 by service 7 2 Output Modes Output Modes FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Specifications continued Secondary Sub Tray e Non sort and face down exit e Non sort and face up exit e Group and face down exit e Group and face up exit CT Paper size 11 x17 5 5 x8 5
214. eration quickly and easily The basic format includes an introductory explanation of each function step by step procedures and illustrations to enhance many of the procedures Caution statements specific to a topic are located on appropriate pages Special notes are located at the bottom of the page Help Mode Help can be obtained for any function or mode that is displayed on the screen Introduction 1 3 Introduction Product Overview The Di750 is a digital printer copier that can be used as a stand alone copier or it can be used as a high speed network printer when connected to the optional Pi7500 Printer Controller The Di750 can also be used as a print server on a network operating system Separate operator s manuals and installation instructions are included with the optional Pi7500 Printer Controller Digital technology and memory capability of the Di750 provide many advantages over the conventional photocopying process In conventional photocopying a scanned image virtually remains intact as it is represented on the drum and then copied onto the output media While many conventional settings can be made before outputting the copies to effect image reduction lens adjustment image erasure and job store etc the conventional photocopying process cannot transform the image into bits or store image data into memory In the Di750 a scanned image is electronically digitized into data bits that are represented in code for
215. erations ONO Key Operator Mode 14 9 Key Operator Mode Copier Initial Setting 2 Initial settings are the settings that display automatically when the copier is powered on when Panel Reset timer is operated or when Panel Reset key is pressed These settings can be changed by the key operator as shown in this section Initially i e at installation the Basic Screen displays the following condition to meet Energy Star requirements Initial Setting Copy Mode 1 1 Copy Density AES Lens Mode 1 1 Paper Tray APS Output Mode offset sort When Initial settings are changed by the key operator the new initial settings display when the copier is powered on when Panel Reset timer is reached or when Panel Reset key is pressed The following initial settings can be changed by the key operator Copy mode EDH 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 Copy density AES manual Lens mode AMS ratio 0 33 4 00 Paper tray APS trays 1 2 3 or 4 Output mode non sort group staple sort stapling amp folding folding cover sheet Special original Image Quality Text Photo Enhance Special Original Original Form Rotation OFF Setting procedures are described on the following pages NOTE The most commonly used settings are established at installation Before changing any of the copier settings be sure that you understand the overall and long range effect of the change 14 10 Key Operator Mode
216. erations Reserve continued Job Status Screen Touch the STATUS key on the Basic Screen to display the Job Status Screen see below The Job Status Screen allows you to perform the following functions Confirm machine status e Change order of reserve job Delete reserve job e View previous job list View tray information and machine status of the other machine in tandem mode To return to the Basic Screen touch OK on the Job Status Screen Basic Screen d OB STA DISPLA a NO won staus dE PAGE i Job Status Screen TOTAL PAGE s PAGE S MINUTE S TANDEM CONNEC LEFT TED STATUS EI INFORMATION 1 COPIER PRINTING 20 100 2 OPERATING A CERS z a ieee TE Sahat 3 PRINTER RESERVE PT eee i z r e APPLI 4 RESERYED JOB DOES NOT EXIST Tray4 55x85HR UI SE ROTATION S un RESERYED JOB DOES NOT EXIST Bypass 5585HR m l 5 NO Displays the No 01 99 for each job assigned to the machine MODE Displays the machine s current mode of operation Five modes are listed below COPIER RESERVE COPIER PRINTER RESERVE PRINTER CONTROLLER STATUS Displays the current status of the machine for each job TOTAL PAGE s Indication Meaning READY Ready to use in each mode
217. erator Mode HDD Management Setting 18 Use this function to manage the image data stored in the optional HDD and to check the space available for new data e Password list delete Display the password list on the screen or delete the image data JOB by deleting the corresponding password from the list e JOB auto delete period setting Specify the period of time 1 to 52 weeks to keep each data so that it will be deleted automatically when specified period has passed e State of HDD capacity Check the space in percentage Key Operator Mode Screen 2 e U1 Trou size setting 12 Energy saver setting 16 Side 2 lens adjustment 17 Finisher adjustment 13 Memory switch setting 18 HDD management setting Machine management list print t Password List Delete Screen ABCD1111 2000 11 03 ABCD2222 2000 11 17 EFGH3333 2000 11 19 DELETE JOB Auto Delete Period Setting Screen Auto delete Auto delete ON OFF Period to deletion 2 week s CANCEL HDD Management Setting Menu Screen 1 Password list delete JOB auto delete period setting State of HDD capacity PREVIOUS SCREEN Password List Delete Screen ABCD1111 2000 11 03 EFGH3333 2000 11 19 PREVIOUS SCREEN PREVIOUS SCREEN DELETE State of HDD Capacity Screen Oz 1008 i Occupied area 1 Space area PREVIOUS SCREEN Key Operator Mode 14 49 Key Operator Mode HDD Management Setti
218. erflow occurs during the reserve operation CONTINUE also appears on the active screen In this case the machine will not stop until all the jobs on standby for printing are completed e To delete the scanned data and discontinue the last reserve job touch JOB STOP e To give up further scanning but print out the data already scanned for the last reserve job touch SCAN STOP NOTE If the job settings include Booklet mode SCAN STOP will disappear e To continue scanning the last reserve job touch CONTINUE as the current printing job gradually enables memory for new data 16 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Power OFF ON Screen When any trouble affects the electric signal of the copier the Power OFF ON Screen will be displayed Power OFF ON Screen Please A O Please turn the power OFF and ON If SC still occurs call your service representative Troubleshooting 16 5 Troubleshooting Clearing Mishandled Paper A CAUTION When removing mishandled paper be sure to leave no torn paper inside the machine avoid touching the drum or scratching it in any way and keep all metal and magnetic objects e g watches jewelry etc away from the drum area When a paper misfeed occurs the copier stops making copies and mishandled paper codes display on the screen to indicate misfeed area s A flashing code indicates the area that should be cleared first To view Help screen instructions touch Illustration
219. ergy saver as described below Low power mode enables you to conserve energy by maintaining a lower fixing temperature during periods of copier inactivity Shut off mode conserves even more energy by partially turning OFF the power supply Auto Low Power This function automatically lowers the power after a specified period of copier inactivity The Auto low power function can be set to 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes 120 minutes 240 minutes Initially the mode is set to function after 15 minutes of copier inactivity For the key operator setting see p 14 39 The Energy Saver On Off LED goes on Basic Screen Low Power Mode Press any key to cancel STATUS Release Auto Low Power Press any key on the control panel The Auto low power will be released and the LCD screen recovers usual brightness 5 2 Copier Management Copier Management Energy Saver Mode Continued Manual Low Power Press Energy Saver On Off The Low Power Setting Screen will be displayed Touch YES to activate the Low power mode NOTE The Manual low power setting can be selected by Key operator For the key operator setting see p 13 40 to p 13 45 When selecting the Manual low power setting the Manual shut off setting is released When Manual low power is on the following message will be displayed on the dimmed Basic Screen The Energy Saver On Off LED goes on Low Power Setting Screen Basic Scr
220. es as desired When 2 Repeat mode is selected Page spece function of Image shift can be used to make the desired amount of blank space between the two images on a page See p 9 34 to p 9 37 6 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 7 Enter the desired print quantity 8 Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass IMPORTANT DO NOT CLOSE THE DOCUMENT HANDLER WHEN AUTO 2 REPEAT 4 REPEAT OR 8 REPEAT IS SELECTED IN STEP 3 When using Platen store mode 1 2 mode can be selected See p 6 27 to p 6 28 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 9 Press Start After copying is completed touch Repeat on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 28 Applications Applications Frame Fold Erasure Use Frame Fold Erasure to eliminate black copy marks along borders Frame erasure amount 1 15 mm in 1 mm increments Initial frame erasure value 10 mm Fold erasure amount 1 30 mm in 1 mm increments Initial fold erasure value 10 mm Original copy paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions None Incompatible Special Originals None Incompatible Applications Repeat All lmage Area SS NS NS NS SO Frame Fold Erasure Selection Screen Application Selection Screen JOB 10 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT e
221. esired menu item from 1 5 7 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 8 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOTES 1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit code Key Operator Mode 14 35 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Timer Interrupt Password Setting 5 Use this password setting mode to establish a 4 digit password requirement for using Timer Interrupt function The default password of 0000 allows the timer function to be interrupted without the requirement for password entry Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Timer Interrupt Password Setting Screen 1 4 7 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting Timer setting Timer action ON OFF setting Timer interrupt password setting 4 digit Lunch hour off setting Timer interrupt password set PREVIOUS ES See _ Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 9 Weekly timer Enter your 4 digit Weekly timer master key code then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Set
222. et with Stapling amp Folding mode Trimming Width 10 mm max Trimming Unit Tray Capacity Approx 512 sheets max 100 sets max of 2 5 sheet folded booklet 50 sets max of 6 10 sheet folded booklet 32 sets max of 11 16 sheet folded booklet Paper Weight Compatibility Chart EDH 13 34 Ib 13 110 Ib 200g m thick paper in 1 1 or 1 2 copying with SDF mode Main Body Trays All Trays 16 24 Ib Tray specified in Thick 1 25 45 Ib Tray specified in Thick 2 46 110 Ib 200g m thick paper in 1 1 or 2 1 only Large Capacity Cassette 16 24 Ib LCC specified in Thick 1 25 45 Ib LCC specified in Thick 2 46 110 Ib 200g m thick paper in 1 1 or 2 1 only Automatic Duplex Unit 16 45 Ib Multi Sheet Bypass Tray 16 45 Ib Finsher FN 104 FN 4 13 110 Ib 200g m thick paper Cover Inserter A 13 110 Ib 200g m thick paper Trimming Unit TMG 1 16 45 Ib One 110 lb sheet only used as a cover NOTE Reliability and copy quantity are not guaranteed for all Special papers Use only paper that is recommended by us Paper Information 4 11 Section 5 Copier Management Energy Saver Mode Auto Low Power Manual Low Power Auto Shut Off Manual Shut Off Entering an ECM Password Weekly Timer Function Timer Interrupt Counter List To Display Counter List To Print Counter List Copier Management 5 1 Copier Management Energy Saver Mode There are two modes for the En
223. eturn to the Application selection screen Make additional copying selections Touch OK to return to the Basic screen Enter the print quantity amount Position up to 100 originals face up on the EDH document handler tray Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine Combination Copy 2 4 or 8 originals on 1 sheet p 9 10 OaRWND ch OO ON Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch Combination to display the Combination mode selection screen Touch 2 in 1 4in1 or 8in1 Touch OK to return to the Application selection screen Make additional copying selections Touch OK to return to the Basic screen with AMS automatically selected You may change this setting When all settings are correct enter the print quantity amount Place original s face up on the EDH document handler tray Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine Booklet p 9 12 OO JO om E ob o 10 11 12 First load 11 x17 or 8 5 x11 R paper in a tray Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch Booklet to display the Booklet mode selection screen Touch NO COVER SHEET COVER WITH COPY SHEET or COVER WITH BLANK SHEET Select the cover sheet tray source and the binding mode if required Touch OK to return to the Application selection screen Make additional copying selections or touch OK to return to the Basic scre
224. explanation when the flashing mishandled paper code displays Be sure to remove paper from each flashing location until all locations are cleared Mishandled paper Please remoye a paper following a guide Job 10 Illustration explanation IT STATUS Open Tray 4 front door Open vertical conveyance door and remove paper The following 19 mishandled paper codes display for specific areas of the machine Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Location Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Multi sheet bypass tray Right side cover of Main body Tray 4 LCC Multi sheet bypass tray and Main body Main body Code 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 Location Main body Main body ADU or Main body Finisher EDH EDH Finisher Cover Inserter Finisher Book making unit Trimming unit 16 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Clearing Mishandled Paper continued A WARNING The right rear area of the conveyance fixing unit generates high voltage If touched electrical shock may occur DO NOT TOUCH A CAUTION The fixing unit is internally very hot To avoid getting burned DO NOT TOUCH the area Use care when withdrawing the convayance fixing unit and remove the mishandled paper
225. f the selected stamp Specify the desired position size etc according to the options provided on each screen then touch OK to return to the Stamp Overlay selection screen The Overlay function will be selected simply by touching OVERLAY to highlight it Touch OK to return to the Application selection screen Make additional copying selections or touch OK to return to the Basic screen When Overlay is selected the Store mode is automatically selected and APS and AMS are released Set the desired Copy mode Copy density Lens mode and Copy size then enter the print quantity amount Position original s FACE UP in EDH document handler tray or FACE DOWN on platen glass When Overlay is selected follow the scanning procedure below 1 Position the overlaying original in the document handler or on the platen glass then press Start to scan 2 The second and subsequent pages are to be overlaid in printing Place them in the document handler or on the platen glass then press Start IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION 3 When scanning job is completed touch STORE to remove its highlight and thus turn off the Store mode Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine Shortcuts 13 9 Shortcuts Loading Paper p 15 2 Main Body User Adjustable Trays Tray 1 500 Tray 2 500 and Tray 3 1 000 1 2 3 Withdraw the main body tray then
226. fApplication L Stamp Overlay CHARACTER SET NUMBERING PRINTING POSITION 20 pt d Wes 0001 0002 0003 PRINTED PAGE ALL PAGES 0001 1000 0002 1000 141000 2 1000 STARTING No FINE ADJ OF CHARACTER PRINTED SITI L iG Page Numbering Type Selection Screen d ed PA BER O Book pe dp pp press O MARK JApplication L Stamp Overlay CHARACTER PAGE NUMBERING PRINTING POSITION 10pt P1 P2 P3 1 5 27 5 3 5 ean PRINTED PAGE FRONT amp BACK 1 2 3 HINT ON 1 2 3 15 525 53 STARTING No 141 1 2 1 3 1 FINE ADJ OF OSITION CHARACTER PRINTED SIZ PAGE STARTING No Watermark Selection Screen d d WATER MA o BEN JEE oe ore MARK JApplication LStamp Overlay WATER MARK DENSITY FOR YOUR LIGHT TOP SECRET CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION DO NOT COPY NORMAL PLEASE FOR YOUR 6 DRAFT REPLY URGENT COMMENTS ry DARK Dank FINE ADJ OF Sg oK 1 FINE ADJ OF _POSITION Date Time Type Selection Screen o O Book Hz MARK JApplication L Stamp Overlay DATE TIME PRINTING POSITION CHARACTER SIZE 10 pt 00 1 23 nem Jan 23 2000 NO DISPLAY 1 23 00 23 Jan 2000 1 23PM PRINTED PAGE ALL PAGES 23 1 00 13 23 CHARACTER PRINTED Watermark Numbering Type Selection Screen rA MARK J Application Stamp Overlay Select desired WATER M
227. fter each entry e When a page number is larger than the total original count a sheet is inserted as the last page e Insertions occur in sequence even if page numbers are entered out of sequence To clear an incorrect entry touch DELETE or C then enter the correct page number e When setting more than 15 locations touch the arrow key to move to the next page Option Touch Booklet on the Image Insertion No Setting Screen to use this function 5 When all page number entries are made touch OK The Application Selection Screen will be restored 6 Select additional copying features as desired 7 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen The Store mode is automatically selected 8 Scan the document handler images 1 Position originals FACE UP in the document handler 2 Press Start to scan originals 9 Enter the desired print quantity 10 Scan the platen glass images 1 Open the document handler 2 Position an original FACE DOWN on the platen glass then close the document handler IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS ACCORDING TO PAGINATION 3 Press Start to scan the original 4 Remove the original and repeat for each original Be sure to press Start for each original Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired then EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 11 Start printing 1 Touch STORE to deselect it 2 Press Start After copy
228. g Unit 00 eee cere eereeeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 15 9 Contents Section 15 Maintenance amp Supplies continued Preventive Maintenance ccccceeeeeeeneeceeeeeenneeeeeceeaaeeeeseeeaaaeeeeseeeaaeeeeseeeaeeeeeesenaaees 15 10 Reading the PM Counter 00 c ec eeceeeeeneeesneeerneeeeeeeeneeeeaeecaeeseeeeeeeesenaeenaeeesas 15 10 Printing the PM Counter 0 cc eeceeceeeeeeeneeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeesaeeseeeseeeesenessaeeesas 15 10 Cleaning the Left Partition Glass ccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeetaaeeseeueeeeeeaeees 15 11 Cleaning the Document Glass and Cover 15 11 Section 16 Troubleshooting ele 16 2 Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble 16 3 Memory Overflow ccccccccesseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeseaaeeseeaeesseaaeeseeaeeeeeaeeeee 16 4 Power OFF ON Screen c ccccssceceeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeseneeeceaaesegeneeesaaaeseneeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeseaaeeeneas 16 5 Clearing Mishandled Paper ssssseessssesrsssrrsssrssrssssrirssrinsssrnsssnnnstnnttnnnssnnnnnrnnnnennnnnn 16 6 elei Re al 16 8 Section 17 Machine Specifications lee le EE 17 2 Index Section 1 Introduction To the User Key Operator Functions Copier Service Repairs amp Supplies Machine Labels Control Panel with Interactive Touch Screen Overview of the Operator s Manual Help Mode Product Overview Features of the Di750 Copier Features Standard Equipment Optional Equipment Introduction 1 1 Introdu
229. g reserve job during Tandem mode copying If scanning of the next reserved job is performed during the tandem mode copying that job will also be performed in the tandem mode Up to 5 jobs including the present job can be reserved Tip Interrupt mode during Tandem mode copying Interrupt copying is available only on the copier with Interrupt pressed The tandem mode copying on the copier in interrupt mode will be suspended until the interrupt copying is completed If the interrupt mode period is of long standing the Allocation recovery mode will activate to enable the other copier to handle the remaining print quantity 12 4 Tandem Mode Tandem Mode To Stop Scanning Printing To cancel the tandem copying job 1 Press Stop on the control panel of the primary copier The scanning printing job stops immediately and the popup menu appears on the Basic Screen of the primary copier to ask you whether to continue or terminate the job At this time the tandem mode is not released 2 Touch CONTINUE to go on or EXIT to delete all the scanned data and to release the tandem mode To cancel the job in the secondary copier only 1 Press Stop on the control panel of the secondary copier The secondary copier stops the current operation immediately and the popup menu appears on the Basic Screen of the secondary copier to ask you whether to continue or cease the operation At this time the tandem mode is not released NOTE If temporary s
230. ge Data Storing Screen will be displayed The machine automatically starts to store the overlaying image data in the HDD The Overlaying Image Selection Screen will resume when the storing function is completed To continue to store the overlaying image data return to step 4 9 Touch OK to return to the Stamp Overlay Selection Screen 10 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 11 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen Applications 9 47 Applications Overlay Memory continued To Overlay Image Stored in HDD The following procedure describes how to overlay the image stored in HDD onto each page copied in the job g APS and AMS are automatically released g Magnification is initially set to 1 1 This setting is changeable g Original Copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 g Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions None g Incompatible Special Originals Resolution Very high Mixed Original SDF g Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Combination Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Repeat AUTO Layout Reduce amp Shift in Image Shift WATERMARK WATERMARK NUMBERING Storing image in Overlay Memory Application Selection Screen Stamp Overlay Selection Screen ed STAMP OYERLA o REG JOB 10 o BORK ARK f Application L Stamp Overlay FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT
231. ge No locations of the images you will be scanning from the platen glass Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch Image Insert to display the Image insertion No setting screen Enter up to 30 page No locations touching SET after each entry When all page No locations are entered touch OK to restore the Application selection screen Make additional copying selections or touch OK to return to the Basic screen The Store mode is automatically selected To start scanning position the regular originals face up on the EDH document handler tray then press Start After the originals on the EDH document handler tray are scanned enter the print quantity amount for the job Next position one original at a time on the platen glass in ascending order of pagination i e 1 n The platen glass originals can be paste ups graphs photos newspaper articles or any non standard document In turn press Start to scan each original from the platen glass Touch STORE to exit the Store mode Press Start to combine the non standard images scanned from the platen glass with the regular images scanned from the EDH document handler When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset machine Shortcuts 13 5 Shortcuts Book Copy p 9 19 On ch A ech 12 13 OO oO OO Joo First load letter sheets in a regular tray or in the Multi sheet bypass tray Touch APPLI to display the Application
232. gs Initial settings represent the initial condition when power is turned on when ECM password is set or when Panel Reset mode is restored either manually or automatically Print Quantity 1 Magnification Ratio 1 1 key operator setting EDH ON key operator setting Copy mode 1 1 mode key operator setting AES Automatic Exposure Selection ON key operator setting APS Automatic Paper Selection ON key operator setting Finisher Non sort on Primary main exit tray key operator setting Panel Reset Mode The Panel Reset function can be set for OFF 30 seconds 1 minute 1 5 minutes 2 minutes 2 5 minutes 3 minutes 3 5 minutes 4 minutes 4 5 minutes 5 minutes by the key operator Initially the mode is set to function after 1 minute of copier inactivity The Panel Reset key function also re displays the Basic Screen unless these settings are changed by the key operator in the Copier Initial Setting Screen See p 14 10 to p 14 11 Automatic Paper Selection APS When APS is highlighted on the touch screen the appropriate copy paper size is automatically selected When copying from the platen glass or document handler APS detects the sizes indicated below For key operator settings of APS see p 14 40 to p 14 45 PLATEN GLASS 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 RADF 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R A4 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm Automatic Magnificatio
233. h EDH or positioned on the platen glass STD size mode Use Non STD size mode to specify the scanning area manually for copying or printing special size originals Use Tab paper mode to copy tabbed original including the image on the tab part onto tabbed copy paper CT Scanning sizes in Non STD size mode 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 R A3 B4 A4R B5R A4 B5 WHOLE AREA Original sizes in Tab paper mode 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 A3 B4 A4R A4 B5 Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Folding Stapling amp Folding Trimming with Booklet Incompatible Special Original Mixed Original Non STD Size and Tab Paper cannot be selected at the same time Incompatible Applications Combination Booklet Book Copy Non Image Area Erase Image Shift Storing image in Overlay Memory g g g g Special Original Screen Popup menu for Non STD size mode Select condition to scan originals mer g JOB 10 IMAGE QUALITY Text Photo ENHANCE SPECIAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL S JOB 10 Phe ORIGINAL
234. he copying settings in Interrupt mode are as follows Copy Mode ki EDH ON AES ON Lens Mode 1 1 1 00 APS ON Print Quantity 1 Finisher ON Select other copying features that are compatible with the Interrupt mode if desired 5 Press Start 6 When Interrupt copying is completed press Interrupt again to return to the settings of the initial job 7 Replace the initial original then press Start to resume copying NOTES 1 In Reserve mode pressing Interrupt before the copier finishes scanning originals of the reserve job will clear the settings selected for reserve job 2 When Mode Check is pressed during Interrupt Copying the information displayed reflects the initial copy job settings Check mode will not display Interrupt copy job information 6 38 Basic Operations Basic Operations Help Mode Use the Help key to access information about the current screen mode and to learn about setting procedures The Help key can be pressed from any screen except Program Memory and Key Operator Screens The Help Screen also includes the Help menu icon in the center When the HELP MENU key is touched the Help Menu Screen displays a list of all of the copier functions When a function item is touched the Help Screen displays information specific to that topic The KEY OPERATOR MODE key is also provided in the lower left position of the Help Screen When touched the Key Operator Password Entry Screen will be di
235. he current state of HDD capacity 2 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations 14 50 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Key Operator ECM Form No Password Count Limit No Password Count Limit Key Operator Mode 14 51 Section 15 Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper Paper Indicator Paper Empty Indicator Using the HELP Key Loading Paper in Tray 1 2 and 3 Loading Paper in Tray 4 C 305 C 305L Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 1 2 or 3 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 4 C 305 C 305L Adding Toner Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Empty Trash Basket of TMG 1 Trimming Unit Preventive Maintenance Reading the PM Counter Printing the PM Counter Cleaning the Left Partition Glass Cleaning the Document Glass and Cover Maintenance amp Supplies 15 1 Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper Paper Indicator _ E The Paper indicator always lights on the tray key of the Basic Screen to indicate the paper level Paper Empty Indicator or UI The Paper empty indicator flashes on the tray key of the Basic Screen when a tray is empty Add paper to the tray
236. he primary copier The scanning job will stop immediately and the tandem copying job will be suspended on both copiers At this time the tandem mode is not released Take the same measure to be applied for single copier referring to p 16 4 On the secondary copier The secondary copier will start the tandem copying job when the memory becomes available after completing some reserve jobs In this case the Allocation recovery mode functions to continue the tandem printing job on the primary copier until the secondary copier becomes available for the job If the memory of the secondary copier cannot be available despite the elapse of time the tandem mode will be released on the secondary copier and the Allocation recovery mode functions to complete the job on the primary copier When the power is turned off on either the primary or secondary copier The tandem mode will be released automatically in either case Restart the procedure from the first step 12 6 Tandem Mode Section 13 Shortcuts Set Reserve Job Store Originals Scanned from Platen Store Originals Scanned from EDH Stapling amp Folding Folding and Trimming Mixed Original Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Reverse Image Repeat Image Frame Fold Erasure AUTO Layout All lmage Area Image Shift Reduce amp Shift Stamp Overlay Loading Paper Addi
237. hecking steps or to the Basic Screen to start copying Check Screen CHECK MODE _ APPLICATION MODE 1 Rev mage This JOB is cancel CHANGE RELEASE PROOF EXIT SETTING J SETTING COPY To release the settings 1 Touch the desired special original key or application function key on the Check Screen to highlight it The dimmed RELEASE SETTING key will be clear 2 Touch RELEASE SETTING 3 Touch YES to cancel the application function or NO to restore When YES is touched the selected function will be released and the key will disappear from the Check Screen 6 36 Basic Operations Basic Operations Interrupt Mode Use the Interrupt mode to interrupt copying in progress to perform a simple job When interrupt copying is completed the settings for the initial job restore automatically and the Basic Screen displays Press the Interrupt key when the copier is in the following conditions e Printing continuously the image stored using Store mode e Scanning the originals using Store mode e Scanning the originals using Store mode while printing in Reserve mode If desired key operator can change the timing to stop current machine operation for interrupt copying Note that the compatible copying conditions vary according to the timing select
238. hed sets FN 4 also folds or staples amp folds copies into booklet styled sets LCD touch screen displays interactive operation screens Control panel controls copier operations Machine Information 3 3 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued Internal Machine Toner cartridge 87 Conveyance part Toner unit Drum unit Fixing part Lever A Knob Conveyance Fixing unit q Internal Machine Call outs Toner cartridge holds toner and is to be replaced when supplying toner Toner unit holds the toner supply Drum unit forms the copy image Lever A can be moved to withdraw the conveyance fixing unit for removal of mishandled paper 5 Conveyance Fixing unit passes the paper through the drum unit and fuses the toner onto the copy paper and is to be withdrawn for removal of mishandled paper Knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper from the fixing unit Fixing part 8 Conveyance part P oO MM ch NO 3 4 Machine Information Machine Information Machine Configuration continued Optional Equipment FN 104 FN 4 Finisher details Secondary sub tray ee inserter A option CG Holds sets ejected in olds cover sheets for use in Cover Sheet output mode or a copied set in Non sort Fac
239. highlighted at the touch The screens also work with the conventional control panel keys CAUTION The touch screen of the control panel is covered with glass Do not drop heavy items on the glass or put excess weight or pressure on it otherwise the glass may break or become scratched After the power switch is turned on the Wake Up Screen displays for approximately 10 seconds until initial machine settings are established Then the Warm Up Screen displays for approximately 6 minutes until the fixing temperature is reached When the Basic Screen is displayed the touch screen becomes interactive The interactive condition enables you to communicate directly with the copier system simply by touching keys displayed on the screen or by pressing conventional keys as required In addition the screens automatically display information regarding machine and copying status Additional help is available any time with the Help key which can be pressed from any screen except from Program Memory or Key Operator Mode Screens Basic Screen Align original on EDH unit ORIGINAL COUNT O0
240. i E 2 8 5x14 DECH OUTPUT APPLI ZOOM RE 11x175 To Set Face Down Non Sort Exit 1 Confirm that the OUTPUT APPLI key is not highlighted COUNT SET Les Casa 25115 ROTATION OFF FUNCTION STORE If OUTPUT APPLI is highlighted touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Menu Screen Select to highlight FACE DOWN and deselect all the other keys then touch OK 2 Confirm that the SORT key is not highlighted If SORT is highlighted touch SORT to deselect it Output Modes 7 21 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine without Finisher continued Face Down Exit continued Basic Screen Align origina COUNTZSET Les FUNCTION COPY DENSITY USER2 USERI A NORMAI LENS MODE COPY SIZE 1 8 5x11 THICK E 2 8 5x14 RECY AMS ZOOM ROTATION OFF STORE To Set Face Down Rotation Sort Exit 1 Confirm that the OUTPUT APPLI key is not highlighted If OUTPUT APPLI is highlighte
241. in the fixing unit A CAUTION The conveyance fixing unit is heavy Use care and drow it out gently otherwise you may be injured A CAUTION DO NOT put your hand between the main body and developing fixing unit otherwise you may be injured A CAUTION Inside the Booklet mode outlet is the roller drive unit DO NOT put your hand into it when removing the folded or stapled amp folded sheet otherwise you may be injured Troubleshooting 16 7 Troubleshooting Copying Hints COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER SWITCH IS ON Fully insert paper trays Close EDH Check to be sure power plug is firmly inserted in electrical socket COPY IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT Manually adjust copy density to darker density Check toner indicator and add toner if required Check paper for dampness Do not leave paper in copier when humidity is high Check to see if Photo Text or Increase Contrast mode is required Check the Density shift COPY IMAGE IS TOO DARK Manually adjust copy density to lighter density Check to see if Photo Text or Increase Contrast mode is required Check the Density shift COPY IMAGE IS NOT CLEAN OR SHOWS SPOTS Use clean originals since dirt marks may be copied Keep platen glass and inner surface of document cover clean Call for service if Call for service is displayed in the message area Check density indicator and lighten if required COPY PAPER MISHANDLES DURING COPYING Fan copy paper and loa
242. ince radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective housing the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation This machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product This means the machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation 2 12 Safety Information Safety Information Regulations continued Internal Laser Radiation Maximum Average Radiant Power 1220 uW at the laser aperture of the print head unit Wavelength 665 695 nm This product employs a Class Illb Laser Diode that emits an invisible laser beam The Laser Diode and Scanning Polygon Mirror are incorporated in the print head unit The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM Therefore the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances Printer head unit Se lt DANGER DANGER VISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN RAYON LASER VISIBLE LORS DE AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM L EVITER L EXPOSITION DIRECTE VORSICHT 8 pe gd WENN ABDECKUNG Rated Output Power CORR EES Seier Ki manic EI K STRAHL AUSSETZEN 665 695nm CBU lt TR Safety Information 2 13 Safety Information Regulations continued For the United States CDRH regulation This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under the Radiation Performance Standard according to the Food Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990 Compliance is mandatory for Laser products market
243. ing is completed touch Image Insert on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 18 Applications Applications Book Copy Use this function to copy an open book or a ledger sheet onto two 8 5 x11 sheets in 1 1 mode or onto the front and back sides of one 8 5 x11 sheet in 1 2 mode If you select another copy size image division will perform incorrectly The following three modes can be selected from the Book Copy Screen 1 Full Scan mode Image division Starts from the first scan 2 Front Cover Full Scan mode Image division Starts from the second scan after the first scan copies normally 3 Front Back Cover Full Scan mode Image division Starts from the third scan after the first and second scan copy normally Scan and store originals into memory then print all pages collectively O Original size Max 11 x17 ledger sheet
244. int 15 No Function 16 Side 2 lens adjustment 17 Finisher adjustment 18 HDD management setting 37 Key click sound No paper JAM 38 Reserve copy function 39 Scan stop by a pull out tray 40 Change page no pos booklet 41 Trimmer STD Non STD size 42 Timer which prohibits Printer 43 Bookmark function 44 Side 2 print STD repeat zoom 45 Delete of overlay image 1 Program memory list 2 User management list 3 E C M management list 4 Font pattern list 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 Stapling amp Folding stopper adj 2 Folding stopper adjustment 3 Trimming stopper adjustment 1 Password list delete 2 JOB auto delete period setting 3 State of HDD capacity 14 6 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode System Initial Setting 1 Set the following initial conditions of the copier e Date amp Time setting Current date and time summer time e Language select setting Language used in LCD English e IP address setting IP address to be accessed from PC Date amp Time Setting 1 Set the current date and time and also the summer time O Default setting Summer time off System Initial Setting Menu Screen Date amp Time Setting Screen ect one of following 1 Date amp Time setting Language select setting IP address setting Present Time 11 403 00 19 34 Setting time Summer time H 03 00 1934 SET PREV
245. ion 1 Introduction Printed A side 3rd TAB ONE FINISHED SET Example C 305 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets 1st TAB 2nd TAB 1st TABS 2nd TABS Section 1 Section 1 Section 1 Introduction Introduction Introduction 3rd TABS Section 1 Introducttion Printed side 3rd TAB 3 FINISHED SETS 15 6 Maintenance amp Supplies Maintenance amp Supplies Adding Toner A CAUTION Keep toner cartridge away from children Although the toner is non toxic do not inhale it or allow it to enter your eyes In case the toner comes in contact with eyes please consult your physician When toner supply is low Please add toner message displays on the touch screen C f SS ii GA Der 1 Open the front door 2 Pull out the toner unit 90 to the right 3 Pull out the toner cartridge lock lever frontward until it stops Remove the empty toner cartridge 4 Shake the new toner cartridge several times to loosen toner then remove the toner cartridge cap 5 Set the new toner cartridge into the toner unit NOTE Align the hollow part on the toner cartridge with the W mark on the toner unit 6 Push the cartridge lock lever backward until it stops 7 Return the toner unit to its original position then close the machine front door securely Maintenance amp Supplies 15 7 Maintenance amp Supplies Inserting a
246. ired key to change the standard setting Some function keys display subsequent screen when touched When all settings are made for each function the OK key can be touched to complete the settings and return you to the Basic Screen With the Basic Screen displayed you can press Start key to perform the operation To cancel the change before returning to the Basic Screen touch CANCEL To recall the standard setting of the Special Originals touch RECALL STANDARD Special Original Screen Basic Screen lt nditisn to seanoriaing JOB 10 IMAGE QUALITY TextPhoto ENHANCE SPECIAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL Mixed original ES Non STD size _ 2 Folded original Tab paper D Increase Contrast High mode Photo Yery High mode SDF HUTT aA 600 dpi Text L7 RECALL 8 2 Special Original Special Original Resolution Image Quality Image quality in the normal default mode 400 dpi is adequate for most copying needs Special modes are available for jobs that require enhanced image quality as for complex text or graphic images or high quality photos etc High Mode High mode sharpens the image more than the
247. is reached Touch Warning only to display a warning message when copy limit is reached The selected key will be highlighted 7 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen 8 If other ECM setting changes are required touch desired key from 1 3 9 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 10 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOTES 1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid A doit password 2 H an invalid ECM master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 8 digit code 14 22 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Lock Delete Program Memory 5 Use this function to lock unlock or delete a Job that has been programmed A locked Job is indicated by a lock icon Bi on the Lock Delete Program Memory Screen The settings of a locked job cannot be changed O Setting options Lock Program memory Unlock Program memory Delete Program memory CT Lock delete is available for all 30 stored jobs CT A blank key indicates that no job is programmed CT zk keck kk kk KKK indicates that a job is programmed but unnamed Key Operator Mode Screen Lock Delete Program Memory Screen opera one of following ite 1 System initial setting 6 Paper type Special size set
248. ishandled paper may occur See p 14 24 to p 14 25 The top sheet is designated face down as the first tab of the finished set Subsequent offset tab sheets follow in sequence Example 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set Section 3 1st TAB Management Printed i side dE 2nd TAB 3rd TAB 1st TAB 2nd TAB ONE FINISHED SET 3rd TAB Example 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets Ia TAB 2nd TAB Section 1 Section 1 Introduction Introduction Section 3 Management Section 1 Introduction EH _ side 1st TABS 3rd TAB 2nd TABS 3 FINISHED SETS 3rd TABS Maintenance amp Supplies 15 5 Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper continued Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 4 C 305 C 305L Load offset tabbed sheets so that the tab extensions are on the right at the rear not front of the tray When loading tabbed sheets in the tray be sure to specify the paper type as TAB in the Key operator mode otherwise mishandled paper may occur See p 14 24 to p 14 25 The top sheet is designated face up as the first tab of the finished set Subsequent offset tab sheets follow in sequence Example C 305 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set 1st TAB 1st TAB Section 1 ond TAB Introduction Sect
249. isplayed Touch YES to activate the Manual shut off mode NOTE The Manual shut off setting can be selected by Key operator For the key operator setting see p 14 40 to p 14 45 When selecting the Manual shut off setting the Manual low power setting is released The Energy Saver On Off LED will light and all other LEDs and the LCD screen will be turned off Shut Off Setting Screen Align original o D COUNT SET
250. it knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper Trash basket holds waste paper cut off from the booklets Trimmer pressure release lever opens to allow removal of mishandled paper FN 4 Finisher Front right cover opens to allow removal x of mishandled paper Front door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper or waste paper see details below NOTE DO NOT place heavy objects on the trimmer stacker or apply any weight on it and DO NOT use it for storage Excessive weight applied to the inside or outside of the trimmer stacker will damage the equipment 3 6 Machine Information Machine Information Site Requirements Unit inches mm Di750 FN 104 FN 4 C 305 4 15 75 CO ER 34 9 15 75 475 887 400 f ee i 63 1 s 1603 47 35 1203 1 2 3 Y Y B 69 4 N le 72 6 gt 1762 1845 Di750 Unit inches mm A A 37 4 nla 208 ds 3 9 an 15 7 950 778 N J47 O 12 65 L 217 pha 34 95 JL 198 100 400 SO
251. ith the page heading toward the front of the copier AA CAUTION When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected remove the copied sets while the paper is exiting otherwise mishandled paper will occur Output Modes 7 5 Output Modes Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray Use this mode when you want to output multiple copies of the original set and have each sorted set offset upon exit The staple mode can be selected with the sort mode With the Primary main tray initially selected on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen FN 104 FN 4 outputs the printed sheets FACE DOWN in the proper order O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 paper is available in landscape type feeding only CT Paper capacity for 20 Ib 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 3 000 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 1 500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 Basic Screen Hs 30mm 1 Touch SORT on the Basic Screen to highlight it 2 Enter the desired print quantity 3 Position originals in the document handler and make copying selections as required When using Store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 29 4 Press Start A CAUTION When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected remove the copied sets while the paper is exiting otherwise mishandled paper will occur 7 6 Output Modes Output Modes Staple
252. ive tin We did an a aes is ee a nee a 2 12 Internal Laser Radiation eeccceeeeeeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaees 2 13 Laser Safety Labelin eer tele ee ENEE ENEE i a a ai 2 16 Ozone Release ia enni Ze dee val ee avi tannery dade elite 2 17 Section 3 Machine Information Machine Configuration icc stedi c pesca eee at a Avie eae eee 3 2 External Machine Call Outs nren a R R Ea a a 3 3 Internal Machine Call Outs c ccccccccesccceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaaeeeeessenaeeeesssenaeeeseseenaaes 3 4 Optional EquipMent ietan ee tice ate ae acta eerie 3 5 e TEE E 3 7 Control Panel Fayout iec sisted ian ada cha hla hahaa ea ate 3 9 TOUCHES GPCI DEE tated de adel aa eden adi Shoat dete 3 10 Bast SCS EE 3 10 thal SS OTL TEE 3 11 Contents Section 3 Machine Information continued Panel Reset Mode si oeisc este a AAE EA ege ERNEST 3 11 Automatic Paper Selection AP 3 11 Automatic Magnification Selection AMS esesseeeseeeeseeesssesssirsssrrnesrnrerrnssrrnsssrnnns 3 11 Automatic Exposure Selection AE 3 11 Automatic Tray Switching AT 3 11 Lead Edge Delete issenccZecacseveciecedesateces eetasate N E ENE N NERA TANNA EE EAEN 3 12 DEMVICE Settings EE 3 12 Finisher Paper Capacity ccccccccsecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeseceeeeeseaaeeseceeeeeaeeesseeeeseaeees 3 12 Key Operator Password 3 12 ECM Master Key Code esssssssisssrrnessnesrsetsrtnssrersstrnettnnetnntstnensstessstnnstnnnennn
253. ize or wide size 42 Timer which prohibits Printer Set the timer to allow the printing job after operating the copying job 43 Bookmark function Select to set the Bookmark function only for the current job set for all the following jobs or deactivate the function 44 Side 2 print STD repeat zoom Select to activate or deactivate the function to rotate the back pages by 180 automatically in duplex copying with magnification changed and the STD repeat selected 45 Delete of overlay image When selecting or storing overlaying image data in HDD using Overlay Memory select to permit or prohibit deleting the selected data or overwriting the data of the same name previously stored in HDD Key Operator Mode 14 45 Key Operator Mode Machine Management List Print 14 Use this function to print out the list selected from the following items e Program memory list Programmed contents of Program memory e User management list Home position settings selected by user e E C M management list Machine information managed by ECM e Font pattern list Font patterns used in the machine Key Operator Mode Screen 2 Management List Print Menu Screen ect one of following 1 Program memory list User management list 3 ecn management list one of following LO Tray size setting 16 Side 2 lens adjustment Energy saver setting 17 Finisher adjustment Memory switch setting 18 HDD management setting Machine manageme
254. ize FUNCTION Proof Copy Al EDH Tee L 00 S 1 8 5x11 ve SPECIAL 2 gt 2 A AMS iw pen GRIGINA 9X HAT Sri NORMA ZOOM 2 85x14 APPLI Stop WISS STAPLE 1 gt 2 v RE 41x17 E ROTATION Start 1 To stop the current copying job press Interrupt For particular jobs in progress copying will cease only after certain phases of the immediate operation are completed as indicated by LED conditions described below e Collectively printing image stored in memory The Interrupt LED blinks until one set of the current job is printed Then the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode e Scanning originals into memory The Interrupt LED blinks until scanning is completed for all originals placed in the document handler Then the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode e Scanning originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode see Note 1 The Interrupt LED blinks until the copier completes the current printing job scans all originals placed on the document handler and prints one set of the Reserved job The LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode All JOB indicators on the Basic Screen will change to INTERRUPT Basic Operations 6 37 Basic Operations Interrupt Mode continued 2 Remove any document from the platen glass or from the document handler if present 3 Place new original s on the platen glass or in the document handler 4 T
255. l A SheetiC Transparency Gi Non image mg AUTO ff SFERE F E 2 3 insertion Ta intericave AGL Area Erase Lama Liat Layout EI UP Chapter Image Insert SCH Fmage Al H Frame Erasure 5 6 Combination H Book Copy B Image Shit 8 9 E SS t Pi Fi Fold Stamp Fold Erasure Booklet 7 noa E ere e ajy ALL gen CANCEL CANCEL Frame erasure Frame Frame je gt I erasure Sau Sou General copying erasure Frame Erasure copying Fold Erasure copying Frame Fold Erasure copying Applications 9 29 Applications Frame Fold Erasure continued 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Frame Fold Erasure to display the Frame Fold Erasure Selection Screen 3 Touch Frame Erasure All sides or Frame Erasure Each side Touch Fold Erasure to use the Fold erasure mode e Touch Frame Erasure All sides to enter the frame erasure amount of the up down right and left sides collectively using the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key from 1 15mm e Touch Frame Erasure Each side to enter the frame erasure amount of the up down right or left side individually Touch UP SIDE RIGHT SIDE DOWN SIDE or LEFT SIDE then use the touch screenl ypad or up down arrow key to enter the desired amount from 1 15mm e
256. l be displayed Density Shift Text Photo 2 0 5 To select the Text mode touch Text to highlight it then press P Utility The following message will be displayed Density Shift Text 2 0 5 To select the Photo mode touch Photo to highlight it then press P Utility The following message will be displayed Density Shift Photo 2 0 5 6 8 Basic Operations Basic Operations Copy Density continued Density Shift continued To select the Increase contrast mode touch Increase Contrast to highlight it then press P Utility The following message will be displayed Density Shift Increase contrast 3 0 5 3 Press any key from 0 5 using the keypad to determine the Density shift 4 Press Stop Density shift is determined Basic Operations 6 9 Basic Operations Lens Mode Automatic Paper Selection APS APS detects the size of originals placed on the EDH or platen glass and automatically selects and feeds copy paper of the same size or selects an appropriate size according to the magnification ratio selected If the appropriate copy paper is not loaded in any tray no copying will be performed and a message will prompt you to load the appropriate paper O Original sizes detected are 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R Wide paper sizes cannot be detected O Incompatible AMS The relation of original size
257. lass A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate ratio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The design and production of this unit conform to FCC Regulations and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations This device must be used with shielded interface cables The use of non shielded cable is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under FCC rules FCC F01 ICES Regulations This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada IC F03 Laser Safety This is a digital machine which operates by means of a laser There is no possibility of danger from the laser provided the machine is operated according to the instructions in this manual S
258. lays machine and copying status help information interactive screens and touch keys for selecting all functions 2 Mode Check displays a screen showing all settings that are selected for the current job 3 Mode switches the machine operation mode to copy scanner server and printer in turn 4 Keypad enters numeric values 5 Proof Copy outputs a single set of copies to confirm whether the current settings are selected properly 6 Interrupt stops copying in progress to allow copying from the platen glass 7 Stop stops the copying sequence deletes the stored memory 8 Timer lights when the timer function is set 9 Energy Saver ON OFF activates energy saving mode for times when the copier is inactive or activates timer interrupt mode when weekly timer function is active 10 Start activates copying or scanning 11 C allows resetting of print quantity 12 P Utility displays the Counter Screen or accesses programming modes for setting special functions 13 Help displays a screen with help for the currently selected function or to access the Key Operator Mode Screen 14 Panel Reset restores copier to automatic mode settings or to key operator settings 15 Program Memory displays screens for selecting job store job recall functions Machine Information 3 9 Machine Information Touch Screen The touch screen is an LCD that displays interactive screens with touch sensitive keys for making copy job selections Selections are
259. lection Screen Touch Combination to display the Combination Mode Selection Screen Touch 2 in 1 4in 1 or 8 in 1 in the desired order area referring to the illustration on the previous page Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen Select additional copying features as desired Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen AMS is automatically selected When selecting any tray other than the one that is set and displayed on the Basic Screen touch the desired tray key Enter the desired print quantity Place original s FACE UP in the document handler When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make the Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 10 Press Start After copying is completed touch Combination on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine Applications 9 11 Applications Booklet Use the Booklet to make a multiple page signature booklet on both sides of ledger legal or 8 5 x11 R paper from any tray unless it is specified as Thick 2 or Tab paper of the paper type in the Key operator mode Original images are scanned into memory and automatically arranged in booklet format in correct order
260. lection screen Make additional copying selections or touch OK to return to the Basic screen Select copy size and enter the print quantity amount Position original s face up on the EDH document handler tray or face down on the platen glass Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine Shortcuts 13 7 Shortcuts AUTO Layout p 9 31 arRWND A 6 Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch AUTO Layout to center the original image on the copy paper Make additional copying selections or touch OK to return to the Basic screen Select copy size and enter the print quantity amount Position original face up in the EDH document handler tray or face down on the platen glass without skewing it When using platen glass DO NOT CLOSE the document handler cover Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine All lmage Area p 9 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch All image Area if you wish to copy the image completely to the edges of the paper Make additional copying selections or touch OK to return to the Basic screen Select copy size and enter the print quantity amount Position original s face up on the EDH document handler tray or face down on the platen glass Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine Image Shift Reduce
261. lete Mode 11 3 To Store Image Data in HDD 11 3 To Delete Image Data eeceeeccceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeesenaeeeeeensenees 11 6 Image Store amp Output Mode ssssssesesseesssieesisssirnssrrnsstntstnntsttnsstnnsssrnnstnnntnnnsnnnnsnnnnt 11 7 Image Recall Mode 2 2 cece iced cede eiria ae Ain sce cent yeaa e eee ENEE 11 9 Section 12 Tandem Mode Tandem Mode Operation cccccceceeeeeeeeneeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeceeeeesaaaeseeaeeeeseaaeesntaeeeseaeees 12 2 How to Stop Scanning Printing cccccceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeas 12 5 Troubleshooting irs mirsanana ARETA A en aad aud ANE ENEA EAE deans 12 6 Contents Section 13 Shortcuts set Reserve Job Zog ian na lee A tama 13 2 Store Originals Scanned from Platen ccccccccceceseeeeeeeeeesnneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesesseeeeenensea 13 2 Store Originals Scanned from EDH cccceccccecceeesneeeeeeeeesnneeeeeeessneeeeeessesseeeeenensea 13 2 Stapling amp Folding Folding and Trimming cccccccceeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeessaaeetees 13 3 Mixed lte IT cara ee ee E 13 3 Sheet Cover Insertion cccceececeecececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeseaeeseeeeeesnaeetee 13 3 GChaple EE 13 4 elle e EE EE 13 4 EEE L e iter E E tities csi peas tice hate ee hs tora a are oo 13 4 Transparency Interleave cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneaeeeeeeeg
262. leted press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 8 4 Special Original Special Original Resolution Image Quality continued 600 Dpi Select 600 dpi mode to improve the resolution This mode uses more memory than the normal default mode or the High mode CT Incompatible Copying Conditions Storing image in Overlay Memory NOTE When using Program job function selecting High or Very High mode in one JOB will be incompatible with 600dpi in another JOB See p 9 21 to p 9 22 Special Original Screen ondition to an origina Ke JOB 10 IMAGE QUALITY TextPhoto ENHANCE SPECIAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL n Ra P High mode increas z Mixed originai Non STD size C Yery High mode Photo b eee Tab paper Fi 600 dpi Text SDF f RECALL STANDARD CANCEL OK 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original Screen 2 Touch 600 dpi 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Make other compatible selections 6 P
263. ligning the edge with the right measuring guide 3 Gently close the document cover to prevent the original from shifting on the glass NN Ki A CAUTION When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected remove the copied sets while the paper is exiting otherwise mishandled paper will occur TIP To eliminate black copy marks on edges when copying from a book without selecting Book Copy mode select Frame Fold Erasure or Non Ilmage Area Erase in Application mode 4 2 Paper Information Paper Information Using the Electronic Document Handler EDH Specifications in 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 Copying CT Original size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R A4 297mm x 482mm 140mm x 216mm CT Original weight 13 lb 34 Ib CT Max EDH tray capacity 100 original sheets 20 Ib bond paper CT Max original exit tray capacity 100 original sheets 20 lb bond paper CT Original placement Face up orientation same as copy paper CT Curling tolerance 10mm or less Using SDF Mode in 2 2 2 1 Copying g Original size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R A4 CT Original weight 13 lb 34 Ib O Max EDH tray capacity 1 original sheet Using SDF Mode in 1 1 1 2 Copying Original size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R A4 CT Original weight 13 lb 110 Ib 200g m thick paper O Max EDH t
264. lly Panel reset may function while tandem mode is selected Initially the tandem mode will be released automatically if Panel reset is activated on the primary copier Key operator can set the primary copier to select the tandem mode as initial setting Apply this setting to the primary copier only if desired Setting on both copiers will deactivate the tandem mode O The Di750 is provided with an Allocation recovery mode which functions when trouble occurs in either the primary or secondary copier to allow the trouble free copier to complete the job CT When the two copiers in tandem mode have the same ECM password registered copying will be available by entering the ECM password in the primary copier only The password will be transmitted to the secondary copier Interrupt copying is available only on the copier with Interrupt pressed If the primary copier is installed with HDD the image data stored in HDD can be output in tandem mode copying CT Corresponding tray sizes on the primary and secondary copiers should be the same when using multiple trays for a single job OQ 12 2 Tandem Mode Tandem Mode Tandem Mode Operation continued CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Group Rotation Alternate Exit CT Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions None CT Incompatible Applications Transparency Interleave SET NUMBERING and WATERMARK NUMBERING in Stamp Overlay
265. ly Timer Can be set according to the needs of each work environment Turn main body power Off On daily or weekly during lunch time on holidays and also enable the timer interrupt mode which allows temporary use of the machine even when the machine is in the daily weekly or holiday Off mode e Wide Size Paper Copy onto paper slightly larger than the specified regular size e Z Folded Original This feature sets the EDH to accept Z folded originals Introduction 1 11 Introduction Copier Features Standard Equipment Main Body with 3 Paper Trays 500 500 1 000 sheets Electronic Document Handler EDH Automatic Duplex Unit ADU Configuration Options with Multi Sheet Bypass Tray 150 sheets Optional Equipment Finisher FN 104 This finisher is equipped with two exit trays Secondary sub tray Four output types can be specified on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen 1 Face down non sort exit 2 Face up non sort exit 3 Face down group exit 4 Face up group exit Primary main tray Four output types can be specified by STAPLE SORT and SORT keys on the Basic Screen and by the setting on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen Face up exit is not available 1 Sort exit 2 Staple sort exit 3 Non sort exit 4 Group exit Finisher FN 4 This finisher is equipped with three exit trays and a cover inserter A option Secondary sub tray Four output types can be specified on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen
266. m Memory directly after they are selected e Proof Copy To ensure correct output before running multiple copies run a proof copy by touching PROOF COPY on the Check Screen or pressing Proof Copy key on the Control panel e Repeat Image Select the horizontal image area across the page and repeat it down the page as many times as the repeat width setting 10 150mm permits in manual or auto e Reserve Scan in subsequent copy jobs while the Di750 is busy printing or copying e Resolution High Very High High resolution mode and Very High resolution mode provide optimal image quality for photos and complicated graphics and text that require high to very high compression amounts e Reverse Image Reverse the image from black on white to white on black or vice versa e Rotation Exit Rotation Sort Rotation Group When no Finisher is installed Rotation Exit alternately switches the horizontal and vertical orientation of each sorted set as it outputs to the exit tray Be sure to load both 8 5 x11 and 8 5 x11 R_ in separate trays including the Multi sheet bypass tray before selecting this feature e Server Function option Store image data in the HDD for future printing e SDF Feed thick original one sheet at a time from the document handler Introduction 1 9 Introduction Features of the Di750 continued e Sheet Cover Insertion Insert up to 30 blank or copied sheets from any tray including the Multi Sheet Bypass
267. m and stored into memory Stored data can be retrieved from memory and output in various ways as controlled by software Digitized image is represented as pixels on a screen or as dots per inch dpi on hard copy The Di750 resolves image in the copier mode at 400 600 dpi and resolves image in the printer mode at 600 dpi Di750 digital technology enables you to e feed originals only once to make multiple copies thereby preserving the condition of originals store image in memory and perform Sheet Cover insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Image insert Book copy Program job Mixed original Repeat Image shift Stamp Overlay enhance photo complex text image quality and enhance lighter image reduce toner consumption and produce clean copies with Non image area erase organize images into booklet format insert images scanned from the platen into a set scanned from the document handler check copying conditions and produce a proof copy before making multiple copied sets confirm the current machine status select offset sort offset group staple sort folding or stapling amp folding output mode using optional Finisher FN 104 FN 4 set reserve jobs to make copies of different types in succession lay stamp watermark or scanned image onto copy image store image data in HDD option for future printing 1 4 Introduction Introduction Features of the Di750 e 600dpi Mode Scan in higher resolution 600dpi than in normal mod
268. mage Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory naun Application Selection Screen when Application Selection Screen when selecting Image Shift mode selecting Reduce amp Shift mode FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT SheetiCover Transparency pi Non image We TE Insertion Interleave Area Erase FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Sheet Cover Transparency Insertion Interleave Chapter Image Insert Se Ne D EE Chapter Image Insert Ech renege Al SE mee E Combination D Book Copy EE Repeat ERANT MOTE WEE Combination pa Image sit 2 Booklet Program DEM match H g ALL Pi FramelFold Stamp Booklet Job Enn Eeue Lie Overlay ke ALL CLEAR CANCEL 9 34 Applications Applications Image Shift continued Image Shift Selection Screen Image Shift mode Image Shift Selection Screen Reduece amp Shift mode 0 BOOK yea ange 0 250 MARK JApplication Limage Shift BOOK De MARK JJApplication up Wal SHIFT Limage Shift 2 3 5 6 8 9 FRONTH HE 2 3 Image Shift DOWN back ES Dom Glens SPS Ellas PAGE LEFT SPACE f SHIFT Image Shift DOWN H BACK SHIFT 1 4 RIGHT E 7 0 A v Image Shift Selection Screen PAGE SPACE selected Limage Shift Sanh shir
269. magnification ratio and copy paper size is shown below Copy size Original size Copy size 11x17 8 5x14 8 5x11 8 5x11R 5 5x8 5 5 5x8 5R 0 33 0 61 5 5x8 5 0 33 0 61 ect 5 5x8 5 5 5x8 5 pete Oe 0 62 0 65 0 62 0 65 2 8 5x11R an noyle E 0 66 0 77 8 5x14 85x11 5 5x8 5 5 5x8 5 0 66 0 77 S S 8 5x11 8 5x11R e e 08073 8 5x11R 8 5x11 0 78 0 79 2 0 80 1 00 8 5x14 0 80 1 00 8 5x11 8 5x11R S amp 1 01 1 29 11x17 Brain exit 1 01 1 29 8 1 30 1 55 41x17 11x17 11x17 us 8514 130 1 55 eee X 1 56 4 00 11x17 1 56 4 00 Rotation functions 6 10 Basic Operations Basic Operations Lens Mode continued Automatic Magnification Selection AMS AMS is one of the initial settings that functions when the EDH is used and Copy Size is selected manually CT Incompatible APS Change magnification Book Copy Overlay Non Image Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Storing image in Overlay Memory An appropriate reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically and applied to the image on the copy size AMS automatically calculates and selects the correct ratio Wide paper size can be specified when AMS functions In this case the same magnification ratio as that of the standard size will be selected automatically AMS ratios are shown in the table below ORIGINAL
270. make the binding area in the center of copies s Key operator can set the machine to position the page numbers automatically on the outside edges of the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbering in Stamp See p 14 40 to p 14 45 7 Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen to complete the selections and return to the Basic Screen 8 Select the 1 2 or 2 2 copy mode 9 AMS is selected automatically When selecting any tray other than the tray that is set and displayed on the Basic Screen touch the desired tray key To release AMS select the desired magnification then select copy size 10 If the copier is equipped with FN 4 Finisher Folding Stapling amp Folding output mode is available Follow the procedure below 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Menu Screen then touch MAIN TRAY to highlight it Touch STAPLING amp FOLDING or FOLDING as desired When selecting STAPLING amp FOLDING the machine with the Trimming unit installed selects TRIM automatically To cancel the trimming mode touch TRIM to deselect it When selecting FOLDING the machine with the Trimming unit installed does not automatically select TRIM Touch TRIM to highlight it if desired NOTE Selecting FOLDING or STAPLING amp FOLDING will automatically switch the output tray to Booklet tray Notice that the arrow pointing to the MAIN TRAY shifts to the Booklet tray Applications 9 13 Applications Booklet continued O
271. mbination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory OO nan Sheet Cover Insertion Screen ele o e and o ertio ee os RE er page ber to be erted MARK Jf Application LS C Insertion COYERS INSERT S PAGE SETTING Enter by keypad Bypass THICK TRAY 1 COLOR FRONT BACK COPY COPY att HI COPY ZB INSERT FRONT BACK BLANK BLANK BLANK ei P J KOERT DELETE gt d jp CHANGE OF THE CHANGE OF THE COVERS TRAY INSERTION TRAY CANCEL Applications 9 3 Applications Sheet Cover Insertion continued Insertion Mode This mode is classified as Copy insertion and Blank insertion The Copy insertion mode copies and inserts plain or colored sheets at locations designated in the page setting area of the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen The Blank insertion mode inserts non copied plain or colored sheets The tray source for insertions can be selected and displayed on the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen Front Cover Mode This mode is classified as Front copy and Front blank The Front copy mode copies and inserts a plain or colored sheet into the finished set as a Front cover The Front blank mode inserts a non copied plain or colored sheet into the finished set as a Front cover When either Front copy or Front blank is selected the corresponding icon will appear on the
272. mx297mm CT Paper weight 16 24 Ib Special stock 20 lb paper is recommended CT Number of trimmed sheet 3 sheets max with Folding mode 16 sheets max using 20 Ib paper only with Stapling amp Folding mode 15 sheets max using a thick cover paper with Stapling amp Folding mode O Trimming width 10 mm max O Trimming unit tray capacity Approx 512 sheets max 100 sets max of 2 5 sheet folded booklet 50 sets max of 6 10 sheet folded booklet 32 sets max of 11 16 sheet folded booklet 7 4 Output Modes Output Modes Non Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray The Non sort mode simply means that the offset stacker finisher modes are not selected Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted sets With the Primary main tray initially selected on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen FN 104 FN 4 outputs the printed sheets FACE DOWN in the proper order O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 CT Paper capacity for 20 Ib 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 3 000 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 1 500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 Basic Screen 1 Touch SORT on the Basic Screen to deselect it if highlighted 2 Enter the desired print quantity 3 Position original s in the document handler or on the platen glass and make copying selections as required 4 Press Start to begin copying in Non sort mode Copies will exit face down w
273. n Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Reverse Image Repeat AUTO Layout Image Shift Stamp Overlay Applications 9 45 Applications Overlay Memory continued To Store Overlaying Image Data in HDD continued Application Selection Screen Stamp Overlay Selection Screen elect Applicatio o Select desired STAMP OVERLAY function BOOK Leer JOB 10 and press OK O PMAR FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT E Stamperia STAMP WATERMARK OYERLAY A 0A All image STAMP Area PAGE a NUMBERING WATERMARK L OVERLAY Image Shift Mal WATERMAR OVERLAY SET FramelFold Stamp NUMBERING DATE MIME NUMBERING MEMORY Erasure Overlay clear Il eweg CANCEL Le 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Stamp Overlay The Stamp Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed 3 Touch OVERLAY MEMORY to display the Overlaying Image Selection Screen NOTE Without HDD the OVERLAY MEMORY key will be dimmed on the Stamp Overlay Selection Screen to show inactivity 4 Touch IMAGE STORE to display the Image Name
274. n Kayttaminen muulla kuin t ss kaytt6ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle Tama on puolijohdelaser Laserdiodin suurin teho on 20 mW ja aallonpituus on 665 695 nm VARNING Om apparaten anv nds pa annat s tt n i denna bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstralning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 Det h r r en halvledarlaser Den maximala effekten f r laserdioden r 20 mW och v gl ngden r 665 695 nm VARO Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle l katso s teeseen VARNING Osynlig laserstr lning n r denna del r ppnad och sp rren r urkopplad Betrakta ej str len For Norway Users ADVERSEL Dersom apparatet brukes p annen m te enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstr ling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1 Dette en halvleder laser Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 20 mW og b lgelengde er 665 695 nm Safety Information 2 15 Safety Information Regulations continued Laser Safety Label A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below MINOLTA CO LTD 2 Higashiakatsuchi Yawata cho Toyokawa shi Aichi ken 442 8585 Japan MANUFACTURED KC DATE
275. n Qa 6 7 Automatic Exposure Selection AE 6 7 Manual Mode Lighter Normal Darker 6 7 Density Shifts mitsa ii iiaa id iai Gai AE n A A 6 8 RE EE 6 10 Automatic Paper Selection APS ccecccccceseceeeecneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeeseaaeeseeas 6 10 Automatic Magnification Selection AMS ccccccccessceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeeeas 6 11 Special Ratio Table g ss d er i ane ieee a ENEE 6 12 Selecting a Special Ratio for Non Standard Paper esseeesessseeesereeerrrrereesen 6 13 Preset and User Set Ratios 0 cccecccceeeeceeeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeseeeeeeeaaeeesseeeeeeaeees 6 14 ZOOM MOG EE 6 15 Vertical Horizontal ZOOM ccecceeetceeeee cette eee dir Annia aN eee ANa eaaa 6 16 ee 6 17 Selecting Paper Type Size for Multi Sheet Bypass Tray cccseseeeseeeeeeeees 6 18 PROSCIVG fis nce cent Eerad eege ge AEE E EA E E EECH 6 21 Set Reserve JOD naisg aaea aana e aeann aaae Dra eaa aan taaa eaa oe er 6 21 ie Te 6 23 Mishandled Paper During the Reserve Geng 6 25 When Paper is Depleted for the Job in Progress ssssesiseenrennsensssnssssssresseene 6 26 Contents Section 6 Basic Operations continued STOKE MOGG aoa eege EE 6 27 Platen Store Mode 6 27 ED Store Mode stage ee 6 29 SE le i ae kite cht EEN 6 30 O07 Ge le DEE 6 30 90 Rotatiomand APS isc eege ceaieeces heh ege eeh een EE 6 30 90 Rotationsand AMIS ease ees Ae Eege eege 6 31 1802 ROA OM EE 6 32 To Release Autom
276. n Selection AMS AMS functions automatically An appropriate ratio is selected based on the relationship of copy size to original size Automatic Exposure Selection AES When AES is highlighted on the touch screen the appropriate exposure level is automatically selected to match the copy density of the original Manual density adjustments override AES Automatic Tray Switching ATS When the selected paper tray becomes empty while copying is in progress automatic tray switching detects the same copy paper size loaded in another tray to allow copying to be continued without interruption The Multi sheet bypass tray is not included in tray switching Machine Information 3 11 Machine Information Lead Edge Delete When using the EDH image deletion of a few millimeters will occur on the lead edge for the purpose of controlling copy quality and copy reliability unless deactivated by the key operator See p 14 40 to p 14 45 Service Settings The following functions can be provided by your service representative who is authorized to change DIP switch settings Contact your service representative if setting change is required Finisher Paper Capacity In the default condition the Di750 will produce unlimited sets If required service can set the copier to stop copying when the number of copies exceeds specified capacity Key Operator Password Service can set a 4 digit Key operator password to access the Key Operator
277. n ale ermode Align origina EDHu JOB 10 EXIT TRAY OUTPUT lt SUB TRAY gt OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt Ee f cover GROUP SHEET GROUP SORT CH FACE E zg uP STAPLING ees P amp FOLDING DOWN FOLDING Lefke Group Face down Finisher Mode Selection Screen Cen ale er mode Align original on EDH u JOB 10 EXIT TRAY OUTPUT lt SUB TRAY gt OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt a 5 croup COVER TRAY j STAPLE SORT SORT SORT T
278. n positioning originals Basic Screen with 1 gt 2 mode selected Align original on EDH unit ORIGINAL COUNT _O MEMORY 100 STATUS OUTPUT SIPY DENSITY LENS MOD
279. n that can be used as a reference when performing all copying jobs especially when capacities sizes and weights are factors Section 4 includes paper information that can be used as a reference when performing all copying jobs Section 5 provides copier management information which should be read before operating this equipment Section 6 includes information on using the touch screen and selecting basic copying functions Section 7 provides information on output modes including sort staple sort group face up folding stapling amp folding cover sheet feed and manual staple functions Section 8 provides information on special original modes Section 9 provides information on special applications modes Section 10 provides information on program memory functions Section 11 describes server functions for storing the image data in HDD during printing Section 12 provides information on tandem mode functions Section 13 provides shortcuts for special application functions and some basic functions Section 14 describes key operator functions for customizing the machine to suit your working environment The key operator mode should be used by an authorized person Section 15 provides information on maintaining this equipment and replenishing paper and toner Section 16 provides troubleshooting information and instructions for clearing mishandled paper Page Design The page layout of this manual is designed to help you perform each op
280. nagement list print PREVIOUS SCREEN t Stapling amp Folding Stopper Position Adjustment Screen Folding Stopper Position Adjustment Screen 9 SET SET NEXT PREYIOUS COPY PREVIOUS NEXT PREVIOUS COPY PREYIOUS ADJUSTMENT J ADJUSTMENT SCREEN SCREEN f ADJUSTMENT J ADJUSTMENT SCREEN SCREEN Trimming Stopper Position Adjustment Screen SET NEXT PREVIOUS COPY PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT SCREEN SCREEN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 2 To display menus 11 to 18 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch Ef Lower arrow key Touch 17 Finisher adjustment to display the Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function Make fine adjustment on the screen To go on or back to another adjustment screen touch NEXT or PREVIOUS Touching PREVIOUS SCREEN restores the Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen 6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 7 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password aR OW 14 48 Key Operator Mode Key Op
281. ndays through Saturdays and Off for Sundays ech Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Timer Action On Off Setting Screen D RI SA BI 2 3 Collective setting by day of the week JOOD o ME o r on o 2000 iy 2 15 16 E JED ore Ha IST ore d 0000A 24 IR o sun NB or E325 e7 20 2 20 yy gt CANCEL 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting Tirer setting Timer action ON OFF setting Lunch hour off setting Timer interrupt password set PREYIOUS SCREEN Timer Action Change Confirmation Screen 3 Collective setting by day of the week BS Fri NB ofr 2000 mm sat MORD OFF d d 18 sun Sg OFF 25 G3 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 Touch 9 Weekly timer Enter your 4 digit Weekly timer master key code then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen See note 2 NOTES 1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit code Touch 3 Timer action ON OFF setting to display the Timer Action On Off Setting Screen The days of the curr
282. ng 18 continued 1 2 3 4 o gt Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note To display menus 11 to 18 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch EX Lower arrow key Touch 18 HDD management setting to display the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen Touch the desired menu key to display the subsequent screen for each function To view the password list or delete the password and the corresponding image data 1 Touch 1 Password list delete to display the Password List Delete Screen 2 Touch to highlight the password key to be deleted then touch DELETE The popup menu will appear for confirmation 3 Touch YES to delete the selected password and all the data corresponding to it or touch NO to cancel 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen To delete the password and data automatically 1 Touch 2 JOB auto delete period setting to display the Job Auto Delete Period Setting Screen 2 Touch Auto delete ON to highlight it then enter the number of weeks to keep each data using the touch screen keypad The maximum period of time is 52 weeks 3 Touch OK to complete the setting To check the current state of HDD capacity 1 Touch 3 State of HDD capacity to display the State of HDD Capacity Screen The bar chart on the screen shows t
283. ng Toner Shortcuts 13 1 Shortcuts Set Reserve Job p 6 21 1 Touch FREE JOB to display the Reserve job setting screen while a current job is in progress 2 Select copying conditions for the reserve job Wait for the current job to complete its 3 scanning operation if necessary Position the Reserve job original s face up on the EDH document handler tray or face down on the platen glass 4 Press Start to scan the Reserve job original s When scanning for the Reserve job is completed the Basic screen for the current printing job will be restored Copying for the reserve job will start when the current job is completed Store Originals Scanned from Platen p 6 27 1 2 3 4 NO Position the original on the platen glass Make desired copying selections and select the 1 1 or 1 2 copy mode Touch STORE on the Basic screen to highlight the Store mode Press Start to scan and store the original image into memory Repeat Steps 1 and 4 until all originals are scanned Touch STORE to exit the Store mode Enter the print quantity amount Press Start to begin copying Store Originals Scanned from EDH p 6 29 1 2 3 4 5 NO Touch STORE on the Basic screen to highlight the Store mode Make desired copying selections Position no more than 100 originals at a time on the EDH document handler tray Enter the print quantity amount Press Start to scan the originals Repeat Steps 3 and
284. ng is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine Special Original 8 7 Special Original Special Original Mixed Original Use the Mixed original mode with the document feeder or with Store mode to copy ledger 11 x17 legal 8 5 x14 letter 8 5 x11 and 5 5 x8 5 or legal 8 5 x14 letter R 8 5 x11 R and 8 5 x11 and 5 5 x8 5 originals Each original in the mixed set will be copied to paper of the same size APS mode or to paper of desired size with appropriate ratio automatically selected AMS mode 0 g g m CO OOOO Use EDH Platen store mode is available Original paper 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 and 5 5 x8 5 mixed 16 Ib 32 Ib 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 and 5 5 x8 5 mixed 16 Ib 32 Ib 5 5 x8 5 original is available in portrait type feeding only EDH capacity Max 100 sheets APS is automatically selected can be switched to AMS when copy size is selected Rotation can be used with AMS Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Staple Sort with APS Rotation Sort Folding Stapling amp Folding Trimming Incompatible Special Original Resolution Very high Z Folded Original SDF Non STD Size Tab Paper Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory Special Original Screen JO
285. nnt 3 12 Weekly Timer Master Key Code ueesesssirsssieesresssisssrirsssrnsssrnnttnntsrrnssrnnsssrn nent 3 12 Weekly Timer Key in Help Screen cceccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeecaeeeteneeeeesnaeeseaas 3 12 Control Panel Contrast Key in Help Screen cceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeseaes 3 13 Staple Sheet Capacity ccecccececceeeeeeecececeeeeeeeeeceeaaeseeeeeseeaaeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeenes 3 13 Notice Message ADD TONER PM CALL sasiieeseeseeseereesrrrsrrssrrrsssrrrsssrrrsrre 3 13 Section 4 Paper Information Positioning Originals on the Platen Glass sssseeseeeeeenesressnetsrinsssrrnsstnnrrnnnssrnnesen 4 2 Positioning an Original for Manual Copying sssssesssessseeessrressssesrsssrrnssrrssrrressrns 4 2 Using the Electronic Document Handler EDH A 4 3 POSITIONING Bel UE 4 4 Positioning an SDF Original 0 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeee 4 5 Positioning Mixed Originals cccccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseneeeesaaeeeeeeeeeeenaeeseaas 4 6 Paper in Main Body Trays easing icas indion i iai iaa 4 7 Paper in Large Capacity Cassette C 305 Option ssssssesesssssssrsssssessrrssssrnssrressrens 4 7 Paper in Large Capacity Cassette C 305L Option ccccceceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 8 Paper in Automatic Duplex Un 4 8 Paper in Multi Sheet Bypass Tray ccccceceesceeesneeeeeneeeeseeeeeeseaeeeseneeeeseaeeseeeeeeeeaeees 4
286. normal mode but uses more memory than the normal default mode Fewer originals can be copied at one time CT Incompatible Copying Conditions Storing image in Overlay Memory NOTE When using Program job function selecting High or Very High mode in one JOB will be incompatible with 600dpi in another JOB See p 9 21 to p 9 22 Special Original Screen JOB 10 IMAGE QUALITY Text Photo ENHANCE SPECIAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL High mode Increase E Mixed original Non STD size 9 Yery High mo Photo KI D rain Tab paper D 600 dpi Tet E SDF ZZ RECALL STANDARD _CANCEL 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original Screen 2 Touch High mode 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Make other compatible selections 6 Position original s in the document handler or on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 7 Press Start After copying is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine Special Original 8 3 Speci
287. not be copied This mode helps to preserve the condition of originals improves copy quality and eliminates unnecessary toner consumption Keep the document cover open throughout the procedure The Non image area erase has two modes namely Rectangular erase mode and Oblique erase mode The copier is initially set to Rectangular erase mode Contact your service representative if you desire the Oblique erase mode o ANG Ka Rectangular erase mode Oblique erase mode Copy mode 1 1 mode only when using Store mode 1 2 mode can be selected Use the platen glass only Original size 11 x17 10mm x 10mm Image cutoff width leading end 5mm trailing end 4mm top and bottom 2mm Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Using EDH APS AMS Rotation 2 2 2 1 Rotation Sort Rotation Group Folding Stapling amp Folding Trimming Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Z Folded Original SDF Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Image Insert Book Copy in EDH Store mode Reverse Image All lmage Area Reduce amp Shift in Image Shift Storing image in Overlay Memory OO O0O0O00 NOTE The Non image area erase function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass In this case consult your service representative about an appropriate place for installation Applications 9 23 Applications Non Image Ar
288. nt list print Font pattern list PREYIOUS SCREEN J 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 2 To display menus 11 to 18 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch E Lower arrow key 3 Touch 14 Machine management list print to display the Management List Print Menu Screen 4 Touch the desired item on the screen The Basic Screen will resume automatically 5 Press Start to start printing the selected list To suspend printing press Stop Press P and C in order to return to the Management List Print Menu Screen 6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 7 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 14 46 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Side 2 Lens Adjustment 16 Use this function to set the adjustment data of the magnification ratio for each tray as Side 2 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 Side 2 Lens Adjustment Screen one of following LO Tray size setting 16 Side 2 lens adjustment Energy saver setting 17 Finisher adjustment Memory switch setting 18 HDD management setting Machine m
289. nter the density level No by using the touch screen keypad 7 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the User Setting Mode Menu Screen 8 If no further changes are required proceed to step 10 9 If other user setting changes are required touch desired key from 1 3 10 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 11 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations 14 12 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode User Setting Mode 3 continued User Density Level 2 Setting 2 Output copying samples from 16 density levels from Lighter to Normal or Normal to Darker then select the desired exposure and program it as USER 2 The programmed copy density can be recalled by selecting USER 2 on the Basic Screen User Setting Mode Menu Screen User Density Level 2 Setting Screen 1 Juser density level 1 setting User density level 2 setting User lens mode ratio setting Darker i Sample Output 1 T H Darker Lighter Not NO 2 1 5 8 4 Normal NO 3 WA l 16 ah Gm 7 2 Set density 14 Lighter l ES SS 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 3 User setting mode to display the User Setting
290. ode Key operator data setting ECH function setting 9 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment PREVIOUS SCREEN Memory Switch Setting Screen ele e amp e o H NO ITEM SETTING CONTENTS 120 seconds Initial setting EDH Panel Reset key selected Program memory auto recall 30 OFF Finisher mode by Full auto Folding amp Stapling Initial by Key counter insert OFF Erasure outside area of orig Area outside of orig erased DB a 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 2 To display menus 11 to 18 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch gl Lower arrow key 3 Touch 13 Memory switch setting to display the Memory Switch Setting Screen 4 Use the procedure below to select the desired item and change the setting 1 To select the desired item touch the arrow keys A and W at the right of the Memory Switch Setting Screen 2 To scroll the screen touch the arrow keys and glat the lower left 3 Touch Change Setting Contents to change the setting of the highlighted item 4 Repeat above steps 1 to 3 to make several changes in succession 5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 6 If no further
291. odes The Folding and Stapling amp Folding modes are available only when the FN 4 Finisher option is installed The Trimming modes Folding and Trimming Stapling amp Folding and Trimming are available only when the TMG 1 Trimming unit option is installed on the FN 4 Finisher When any mode is selected the Booklet feature is automatically selected and indicated on the Application Selection Screen NOTES 1 When copying two sided signature originals using the Folding Stapling amp Folding or Trimming mode release the automatically selected Booklet mode on the Application Selection Screen 2 When copying dark originals or using Reverse Image mode together with Folding Stapling amp Folding or Trimming mode the folded line of the output copies may be slightly shifted The following copy results may be expected when using Folding Stapling amp Folding or Trimming mode In the Folding mode each copied set is folded and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher In the Stapling amp Folding mode each copied set is stapled at two positions saddle stitched then folded and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher In the Trimming modes each copied set is either folded or stapled amp folded trimmed at the edge that opens the booklet then output to the Trimming uint tray CT Use EDH CT Max number of folded sheets 20 Ib Bond in both modes Folding 3 sheets less than in Staple amp Folding mode because they are not cinched firs
292. onitor functions and a service set 4 digit Weekly timer master key code must be entered by the key operator to access the Weekly timer functions To ensure the security of Key Operator mode it is recommended that you establish a unique key operator password along with the key operator ECM master key code and Weekly timer master key code and keep them in a confidential file O HELP is unavailable in the Key Operator Mode Help Screen Key Operator Password Entry Screen P OD 2 EDH oO PAPER FOR ASSISTANCE Key operator password 4 N SUPPLY HELP MENU ABCDE 12345 TEL j o STAPLE SUPPLY TELEPHONE PAPER B SUPPLY 012 345 6789 PAPER PAPER SUPPLY SUPPLY FAX SER 987 654 3210 KC Levee To Key Operator Mode Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 ey operato ode one of follo g ite LO Tray size setting Side 2 lens adjustment Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment Memory switch setting HDD management setting ey operato ode one of follo g ite 1 System initial setting 6 Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting E C M function setting 9 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment PREVIOUS SCREEN J Machine management list print 14 2 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode To the Key Operator continued How to Access the Key Operator Mo
293. onto EDH 8 8 gt BE 6 AN al DS 2 1 1 Insertion originals Place originals re onto EDH gt N 7 S N 4 1 Application Selection Screen Image Insertion No Setting Screen Ade Inse de BOOK KSE er page e eypad O ERK Application Limage Insert FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT PAGE SETTING Enter by keypad 1 15 1 ADDITIONAL FUNCTION ps jes EIB Ss Reverse Al image image wenn ER IO T S Image Shift Booklet ill Stamp Booklet az LU Overlay ke DELETE SET EJ LL Applications 9 17 Applications Image Insert continued 1 Review pages to be scanned from the document handler and note the page number locations for inserting images scanned from the platen glass To insert more than one sheet at the same location enter the page number repeatedly For example if insertion locations are 2 2 6 scanned platen images will be inserted as follows e The first scanned platen image will be inserted after page 2 e The second scanned platen image will be inserted directly after the first scanned Image insertion e The third scanned platen image will be inserted after page 6 2 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 3 Touch Image Insert to display the Image Insertion No Setting Screen 4 Use the keypad to enter the page numbers for up to 30 insertion locations touching SET a
294. opier detects a non standard paper size on the platen glass Select copy size and press Start 1 00 magnification will be selected automatically If this message continues to display after selecting copy size select 1 00 magnification even if it is already indicated then press Start If desired ask your service representative to enable the machine to default to 1 00 magnification in this situation SHEET INSERTION RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED Blank insertion Be sure manuscript originals do not already include blank sheets in the locations designated for sheet insertion Copy insertion To ensure that chapter sheets in 1 2 mode always appear on the right hand side in the finished set insertion sheets must be designated on the page setting screen with odd numbers not even If required make an even numbered original page odd by inserting a blank sheet in front of that page so that the blank sheet is even and the insertion sheet is odd FINISHER STAPLE RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED The 2 staple position functions only on copy paper that is loaded vertically crosswise style 16 10 Troubleshooting Section 17 Machine Specifications Specifications Machine Specifications 17 1 Specifications Product Name Configuration Photoreceptor Method Toner Recommended Operating Environment Warm Up Panel Reset First Copy Out Time Copy Rate Continuous Copy Voltage Current Frequency Grounding Termination Power
295. osition mixed originals face up on the EDH document handler tray Combine ledger legal letter 5 5 x8 5 or legal letter R letter Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine Sheet Cover Insertion p 9 3 1 Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch Sheet Cover Insertion to display the Sheet Cover insertion screen If desired touch FRONT COPY or FRONT BLANK If desired touch BACK COPY or BACK BLANK If desired touch COPY INSERTION or BLANK INSERTION Enter the page number for the first insertion location then touch SET Repeat Step 4 for each insertion location touching SET after each entry Select the desired tray source for the cover and or insertion sheets Touch OK to return to the Application selection screen Make additional copying selections Touch OK to return to the Basic screen Enter the print quantity amount Position originals face up on the EDH document handler tray Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine Shortcuts 13 3 Shortcuts Chapter p 9 8 COON OAR W po a Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch Chapter to display the Chapter page setting screen with 1 2 mode automatically selected Use the keypad to enter the page number of the first title page then touch SET Repeat Step 3 for each additional title page touching SET after each entry Touch OK to r
296. osition original s in the document handler or on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 7 Press Start After copying is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine Special Original 8 5 Special Original Text Photo Enhance Use this function to enhance the reproducibility of half tone and give an image closer to that of the original Text Mode Use the Text mode when copying the text original In this mode text is improved in comparison to using the general mode Photo Mode Use the Photo mode to reproduce a half tone photo image The copy will closely represent the half tones of the original image Increase Contrast Mode Select Increase Contrast to darken lightly printed images e g pencil without changing background exposure In cases where the image is light and background is dark the background will not be changed g Original Copy paper 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 CT Incompatible Copying Conditions None Special Original Screen oondition to scan origina JOB 10 IMAGE QUALITY TexttPhoto ENHANCE SPECIAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL High mode LOMA originai E
297. ouch OK to return to the Basic Screen The Store mode is automatically selected Select the copy mode 1 1 or 1 2 Enter the desired print quantity Position the open book or sheet on the platen glass in the right rear corner aligning the edge with the right measuring guide If Full scan is selected and the originals can be loaded in the document handler EDH store mode is also available If desired position originals into the document handler Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 10 Press Start to Start scanning 11 Remove the first original s Repeat the procedure for subsequent originals pressing Start for each original When Front cover Full scan or Front Back cover Full scan is selected only the front and back covers are required to be scanned from the platen glass If you want to use EDH store mode for scanning the rest of the originals close the document handler and position originals then press Start 12 Touch STORE to deselect the store mode then press Start to print After copying is completed touch Book copy on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 20 Applications Applications Program Job In the ordinary Store mode the combined features selected for the job are applied to all originals to be scanned In the Program Job mode yo
298. perator Mode Function Menu Map continued FUNCTION MENU SUB FUNCTION MENU AND SETTING OPTIONS 12 Energy saver setting Auto low power 5 10 15 30 60 90 120 240 Auto shut off 30 60 90 120 240 13 Memory switch 1 Panel reset timer 2 Panel Reset key function 3 EDH Original effect 4 Program memory auto recall 30 5 Finisher mode by Full auto 6 Initial by Key counter insert 7 Erasure outside area of original 8 EDH frame erasure selection 9 Automatic tray switching 10 Platen APS 11 EDH APS 12 Platen AMS 13 EDH AMS 14 Select tray when APS cancel 15 Platen original size detect 16 EDH original size detect 17 Platen orig size detect SMALL 18 Rotation 19 Rotation 180 angle 20 B6R size original type 21 A3 B4 11x17 8 5x14 F4 orig type 22 Staple mode reset function 23 Job offset operating 24 Continuation print 25 SDF Auto start 26 Key click sound 27 1 SHOT indication time 28 Energy saver screen 29 Start key latch function 30 STOP key function 31 Auto select of Booklet copy 32 E C M password 33 Arrow key change Image Shift 34 Exit direction of 1 sheet 35 An interruption suspended way 36 E C M password input timing Key Operator Mode 14 5 Key Operator Mode Function Menu Map continued FUNCTION MENU SUB FUNCTION MENU AND SETTING OPTIONS 13 Memory switch cont d 14 Machine management list pr
299. perature O VIBRATIONS sch If the machine is constantly vibrated or jolted trouble may l occur Install the machine on a level horizontal floor free from vibrations Vibration SPACE ALLOTMENT Install machine in an area with adequate space for performing copier operations replacing supply items and for conducting preventive maintenance See Site Requirements Section 3 O MACHINE RELOCATION Before moving the machine to another location contact your service representative 2 6 Safety Information Safety Information Machine Installation and Power Requirements continued A CAUTION FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN MACHINE DAMAGE OVERHEATING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND OR PERSONAL INJURY PLUG SOCKET A plug socket is limited in capacity Use an exclusive power source for this machine otherwise an accident from overheating and or smoking may occur The total power consumption of the main body plus all peripherals must not exceed the capacity of the main power supply For plug cable equipment that the socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible O PLUG AND CORD LEAD Unless the power plug is firmly inserted into the socket an accident from overheating and or smoking may occur Firmly insert the power cord plug into the electrical outlet before turning on the copier power switch If the insert
300. pling amp Folding Trimming CT Incompatible Special Originals None CT Incompatible Applications Non Ilmage Area Erase Repeat All lmage Area Overlay Memory Application Selection Screen plicatio o ABCDE FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT SS Jet Wa ABCDE Chapter Image Insert Eich reverse Lal EY A BC D E Combination BS Book Copy Image Shift Booklet Program Galeri Framelfota Samp A BC D E i ABCDE Original Reverse Image copying Wl ze D 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Reverse Image 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Enter print quantity 6 Position original s FACE UP in the document handler or FACE DOWN on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 7 Press Start After copying is completed touch Reverse Image on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine Applications 9 25 Applications Repeat Image Use Repeat image to create labels business cards tickets etc by repeating the selected image
301. r printing NOTE Installation of the optional HDD is required to recall data from the HDD To recall data stored in the HDD enter the password specified at the time data was stored then designate it by the job name Scanner Server Setting Menu Screen SCANNER SERYER _ Uo uz IMAGE STORE DELETE RECALL Image Data Password Entry Screen Recall Job Selection Screen image store password 8 ABCD2222 2000 11 17 1 1 CHARACTE DELETE RETURN TO PASSWORD SCREEN Image Data Recalling Screen from HDD ABCD1111 2000 11 03 EFG 2000 11 19 ll EEN EE Server Function 11 9 Server Function Image Recall Mode continued 1 Press Mode to light up the Scanner Server LED The Scanner Server Setting Menu Screen will be displayed 2 Touch IMAGE RECALL The Image Data Password Entry Screen will be displayed 3 Enter your Image data password from the touch screen keypad To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct password 4 If the password is correct touch OK to display the Recall Job Selection Screen 5 Touch the desired job name key to highlight it then touch to move it to the recall list on the right side Touching JOB CHECK displays the Check Screen to allow you to view all the feature selections made for that job NOTE More than one job at a time can be moved to the
302. r selecting Copy Size 9 30 Applications Applications AUTO Layout Use this function to detect the image area of the original and center the whole image on the copy paper OO OI OO u Copy mode is automatically set to 1 1 1 2 mode is also available only when using Store mode APS and AMS are automatically released Changing Magnification is available Non image area erase is automatically selected Release it manually when using EDH to scan originals Original Copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions APS AMS Rotation Sort Rotation Group Folding or Stapling amp Folding with Booklet Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Z folded Original SDF Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Combination Booklet Image Insert Reverse Image Repeat All lmage Area Image Shift Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory NOTE The AUTO layout function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass In this case consult your service representative about an appropriate place for installation ABCDE 2 ABCDE Set original AUTO layout copying Application Selection Screen JOB 10 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Transparency Non image AUTO Si EI Interleave Area Erase m Layout A R Chapter Book Copy Els gt Program
303. r your 4 digit Weekly timer master key code then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen See note 2 3 Touch 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting to display the Weekly Timer On Off Setting Screen 4 Touch Weekly timer On to activate Weekly timer or touch Weekly timer Off to de activate Weekly timer The default setting is Weekly timer Off The selected key will be highlighted 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen 6 If other Weekly timer settings are required select another desired menu item from 1 5 7 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 8 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOTES 1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit code 14 30 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Timer Setting 2 Use this function to set the On Off times in hours and minutes for each day of the week or set the collective time for the entire week i e the same On Off time for each day Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Weekly Timer On Off Time Setting Screen WEEK 1 Mon M Tue Wed 4 Thu Fri
304. ray capacity 1 original sheet Using Mixed Original Mode CT Original size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 R mixed 5 5 x8 5 original is available in crosswise type feeding only CT Mixed EDH tray capacity 100 original sheets 20 Ib bond paper Unsuitable EDH Originals Gef Curled creased or Paste ups folded originals or cut outs 1 evans Ne eg A Ki iJ En Glossy or transparent OHP Folded punched ace film art paper cellophane or stapled originals Thin or thick originals NOTES 1 See p 8 11 for details of the SDF mode 2 See p 8 8 to p 8 9 for details of the Mixed original mode Paper Information 4 3 Paper Information Using the Electronic Document Handler EDH continued Positioning Originals The document handler EDH automatically feeds up to 100 originals directly to the platen glass starting with the top sheet The EDH should only be used for unstapled unfolded smooth flat originals CT Original size detection requires accurate paper guide adjustment OO APS detects size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R and A4 CT Size weight and capacity are specified for all copy modes on p 4 3 Before placing originals in the tray be sure the EDH is closed fully 1 Position original s FACE UP on the EDH tray Place two sided originals with page one FACE UP 2 Adjust paper guides 4 4 Paper Information
305. re mode is used touch STORE on the Basic Screen to deselect the Store mode when the store function is completed i e after all originals are scanned then press Start to print NOTE To suspend the scanning or printing job press Stop on the control panel The popup menu will be displayed to ask you how to complete the current job Touch CONTINUE to continue the job EXIT to cancel the job and delete the data or EXIT after storing data to HDD to store the data in HDD without printing Basic Screen Press START to restart SCANNER OUTPUT FUNCTION IERES SPECIAL EXIT after storing CONTINUE EXIT data to HDD 9 After scanning all the originals the Image Data Storing Screen will be displayed The machine automatically starts to store the data in HDD The Basic Screen will resume when completed NOTE To suspend the storing job touch CANCEL on the Image Data Storing Screen then touch YES on the popup menu to delete the data or touch NO to continue 11 8 Server Function Server Function Image Recall Mode Use this function to recall the image data stored in HDD to built in DIMM fo
306. recall list to be output in succession provided that those jobs have been stored in the same copying conditions To cancel the job moved to the recall list touch the job name in the list to highlight it then touch de to return it to the left side key If the desired job name is displayed in the recall list touch OK The Image Data Recalling Screen will be displayed to show the current status of transmission 6 When the data transmission is completed the Basic Screen will be displayed reflecting the settings made for that job NOTE To suspend recall touch CANCEL on the Image Data Recalling Screen then touch YES on the popup menu to delete the data recalled to DIMM or touch NO to continue The data stored in HDD will not be erased by this operation 7 Press Start to print 11 10 Server Function Section 12 Tandem Mode Tandem Mode Operation To Stop Scanning Printing Troubleshooting Tandem Mode 12 1 Tandem Mode Tandem Mode Operation Tandem mode enables your Di750 primary master copier to work in tandem with the Di750 secondary sub copier connected using a cross cable for the purpose of providing faster completion of large copying jobs Two units working in tandem distribute a job in half the time of non tandem mode NOTE Service setting is required to use the tandem mode Contact your service representative if desired CT Two Di750 copiers should be connected using a cross cable Two copiers should ha
307. reen JOB 10 IMAGE QUALITY TextPhoto ENHANCE SPECIAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL i Increase pz 2 Soe j High mode Contrast E Mixed original E Non STD size J Yery High mode Photo k mer Tab paper D 600 dpi Text SDF 2 v7 KS 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original Screen 2 Touch SDF 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Make other compatible selections 6 Position a sheet of original in the document handler IMPORTANT BE SURE TO SET ONLY ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make the Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 7 Press Start After copying is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine Special Original 8 11 Special Original Original Form The copier usually detects the standard size of originals fed throug
308. reen will be restored 6 Select additional copying features as required 7 Load the cover sheet paper into the optional cover inserter of the FN 104 FN 4 finisher If the paper size loaded in the cover inserter is not suitable the following messages will be displayed and copying will be unavailable Please load cover sheet in cover inserter Adapt paper size between cover sheet and selected paper 8 Enter the desired print quantity 9 Position originals in the document handler or on the platen glass When using Store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 29 10 Press Start AA CAUTION When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected remove the copied sets as they exit otherwise mishandled paper will occur Output Modes 7 17 Output Modes Manual Stapling The Manual Stapling function is available only with the Cover Inserter A option installed on the FN 104 FN 4 Finisher To use this convenient function simply place a set of paper to be stapled into the cover inserter of the finisher select the desired staple mode from the manual stapling operation panel located on the top of the finisher then press the Staple Start Stop button The stapled set will be delivered to the Booklet tray or the Primary main tray according to the selected mode as described below When selecting the Stapling amp Folding the machine with the Trimming unit installed trims the end of
309. ress Start to scan the original 6 Repeat steps 1 2 and 5 until all originals are scanned 7 Touch STORE to exit the Store mode Basic Operations 6 27 Basic Operations Store Mode continued Platen Store Mode continued 8 Enter the print quantity using the keypad The entered quantity will be displayed on the upper right message area of the Basic Screen To change the print quantity press C and re enter the correct quantity To delete the scanned data without printing press Stop then touch CANCEL on the popup menu to ensure that you delete the data 9 Press Start The copier starts the printing job 6 28 Basic Operations Basic Operations Store Mode continued EDH Store Mode Use this feature to scan more than 100 original into memory from the EDH Use this function in conjunction with the Reserve function to increase efficiency of the copying job CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions None CT Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions Resolution Very high CT Incompatible Applications Image insert Book copy Storing image in Overlay Memory Basic Screen Align original o D COUNTZ SET
310. result in death or serious injury AA CAUTION Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate bodily injury NOTICE Notice provides information on the correct handling or use of the machine to prevent breakage of the copier or some machine part etc If does not indicate concern for personal safety 2 2 Safety Information Safety Information Machine Labels Label Locations ACAUTION A ATTENTION PRECAUCION A CUIDADO WARNING ee ey ll ee D Wen DL burned Do Not TOUCH de se quemarse NO TOCAR ee 4 Sil S D e UL ech A K CAUTION Both sides of the fixing unit EE al i A ATTENTION fal a PRECAUCION A CAUTION A WARNING The fixing unit is very hot This area generates To avoid getting burned DO NOT high voltage If TOUCH touched electrical shock may occur DO NOT TOUCH Top surface of the fixing unit Ald Inside of the fixing unit ral BEZ A CAUTION High temperature A ATTENTION Temp rature lev e A PRECAUCION iTemperatura alta A CUIDADO Alta temperatura gt PET lt gt PET lt
311. rinted side 3rd TAB 3 FINISHED SETS 6 42 Basic Operations Section 7 Output Modes FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Specifications Non Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray Staple Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray Group Mode Using Primary Main Tray Output Modes Using Secondary Sub Tray Folding Stapling amp Folding and Trimming Modes Cover Inserter A Manual Stapling Output Mode for Machine without Finisher Face Down Exit Face Up Exit aple position displayed a e placed origina JOB 10 EXIT TRAY STAPLE lt 1POS gt STAPLE lt 2POS gt OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt f cover Se sl Lal A aroue SHEET a TRAY lA A sor Co STAPLING gt lt MAIN wb Ki Vi amp FOLDING TRAY a al y FOLDING HDD RECALL efke istanbano cance ox _ JOB 10 OUTPUT MODE f FACE GROUP up ROTATION_ FACE GROUP DOWN Output Modes 7 1 Output Modes FN 104 FN 4 Finisher Specifications Use only paper that is recommended by us and stored under the environmental conditions stated for copy quality Special stock is not guaranteed for reliability or copy quality Multi sheet bypass tray Interrupt and Transparency interleaving are incompatible with finisher use This Finisher also accommodates wide pap
312. rizontal Zoom Use the Vertical Horizontal zoom mode to reduce or enlarge vertical and horizontal dimensions independently O Vertical Horizontal zoom range 0 33 4 00 0 33 2 00 in 600 dpi mode and Storing image in Overlay Memory 0 33 4 00 in Resolution very high Basic Screen with the popup menu for zoom setting Align original o D COUNT SET EG C FUNCTION fm D verif qoop Horiz ep ANS THICK Vert 7 2 8 5x14 t eg RECY Casa 85x111 II BI ROTATION OFF STORE 1 Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen to display the popup menu for setting the zoom ratio 2 Touch Vert to select a vertical ratio 3 Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter a 3 digit vertical zoom ratio or use arrows to scroll to the desired ratio 4 Touch Horiz to select a horizontal ratio 5 Use the keypad to enter a 3 digit horizontal zoom ratio or use arrows to scroll to the desired ratio 6 Touch OK to complete the setting To cancel the setting touch ZOOM again to display the popup menu Specify the desired ratios then touch OK 7 Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the document handler as required 8 When all settings are acceptable press Start 6 16 Basic Operations Basic Operations Copy Size The tray selection keys below COPY SIZE are used to select a specific paper tray When a spe
313. rleave Image Insert Book Copy 2 4 8 Repeat in Repeat Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory eht SEN Ch SE Original A Original B Original C alol ch S EEN eh D EN Copied set Applications 9 21 Applications Program Job continued Application Selection Screen Basic Screen Align original on EDH unit oy og FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Non image joa ig AUTO STATUS Area Erase Layout Zoe Ges Reverse All image al gt e Image Area fal r SPECIAL EE BE B Bas mage Shit AS OUTPUT DECISION This JOB is decision APPL S APPUI ee eb PPS Frameiroid bra Ste e ROTATION sob EE Semis Bok SORT CANCEL This JOB is cancelled OFF d m CANCEL SORT 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Program Job The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inacti
314. rn to the Stamp Overlay Selection Screen 6 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 9 48 Applications Applications Overlay Memory continued To Overlay Image Stored in HDD continued 7 Make additional application selections or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 8 The Store mode is automatically selected and APS and AMS are released Set the desired Copy mode Copy density Lens mode and Copy size on the Basic Screen 9 Enter the desired print quantity 10 Place originals in the document handler or on the platen glass then press Start to scan IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION Option Press Mode Check to view selection and make the Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 11 Touch STORE to deselect the store mode then press Start to print After copying is completed touch Stamp Overlay on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine Applications 9 49 Section 10 Program Memory g y o 1 ABC CORPORATION 6 11 2 F 12 3 8 MAIL 13 4 TEST copy 9 14 DEF COMPANY 5 10 15 Job Store Job Recall Program Memory Form Program Memory 10 1 Program Memory Job Store Use Job Store to store up to 30 frequently used cop
315. ry Il 14 23 Paper Type Special Size Set 6 ccc cccccceccssesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeesseesaeeeeeseeaas 14 24 Panel Contrast Key Sound Adjustment TI 14 26 Key Operator Data Setting Il 14 27 Weekly Timer KE 14 28 How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode sssesssseeeseeesrresrreerrreesrnssss 14 29 Weekly Timer On Off Setting TT 14 30 Timersetting E EEN 14 31 Timer Action On Off Setting 3 14 33 Lunch Hour Off Setting l 14 35 Timer Interrupt Password Setting Il 14 36 Control Panel Adjustment TO 14 37 Tray Size Setting VR EE EE 14 38 Energy Saver Setting TI 2l 14 39 Memory Switch Setting 3 14 40 Machine Management List Print 14 0 e eee eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeaas 14 46 Side 2 Lens Adjustment Tel 14 47 Finisher Adjustment Il 14 48 HDD Management Setting Ti9 14 49 Key Operator ECM Form uo ee eeeeccceseeceneseeseeeeeenaeesaeeseeeeseeeseaesaaeeseeeeseeeseeeesaeeeaas 14 51 Section 15 Maintenance amp Supplies LOAGING PAPEM EE 15 2 Nell EE 15 2 Paper Empty Indicator vassi iinan AEEA ARA EEANN TEENAAN EOAR ENAA VEERA 15 2 Using the HELP TTT 15 2 Loading Paper in Tray 1 2 and 3 15 3 Loading Paper in Tray 4 CG 2020 15 4 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 1 2 OF 3 15 5 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 4 C 20p4 208 15 6 AGNO Bt IEN 15 7 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN 104 FN 4 Fintsher 15 8 Empty Trash Basket of TMG 1 Trimmin
316. screen Use to enter a minus number to print from halfway through e g 2 to print 1 from page 4 Original Starting No Setting Screen IER Ke Copy 4 5 6 7 8 9 IRE Rime Gi CU D Applications 9 41 Applications Stamp continued When Chapter is already selected touching STARTING No on the Set Numbering Page Numbering or Watermark Numbering Type Selection Screen will display the Starting No Setting Screen with Chapter starting number setting see below Touch CHAPTER NUMBER or PAGE NUMBER to highlight it then use the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key to enter the desired starting number for each Touch OK to return to the previous screen Starting No Setting Screen with Chapter selected 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A v 9 8 When selecting WATERMARK or WATERMARK NUMBERING touch LIGHT NORMAL DARK or DARK to select the desired density level on each screen 9 When all the desired selections are made touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 10 Make additional application selections or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 11 Enter the desired print quantity 12 Position original s FACE UP in document handler or FACE DOWN on platen glass IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION Option Press Mode Check to view selection and m
317. se orientation of the original is different from the orientation of the copy paper In 1 2 copy mode Rotation arranges the even pages of simplex originals so that the reverse sides of the duplex copies appear upside down In 2 1 copy mode Rotation rearranges the reverse sides of duplex originals when the reverse side is upside down so that they can be read as normal simplex copies 1 6 Introduction Introduction Features of the Di750 continued e Image Shift Create or remove a binding margin at the top bottom right and left edges shift amount from Omm 250mm in 1mm increments reduce image to prevent image loss reduce amp shift amount from 0 250mm in 1mm increments e Interrupt Copying Interrupt copying in progress to perform copying from the platen glass e Job Status Display the Job Status Screen to view the machine status change the operation order of reserve jobs delete the unused reserve job or display the previous job list s Lens Mode Preset Zoom Select Preset ratios three reduction and three enlargement ratios Zoom ratios can be selected from 33 400 in 1 increments 400 dpi or 33 200 increments 600 dpi e Machine Status Confirmation Display the current machine status on LCD for confirmation e Magnification Set user programmable ratios under User Set 1 User Set 2 and User Set 3 e Manual Shut off Shut off the main power when pressing Energy Saver On Off key e Mixed Origin
318. selected paper tray displayed on the screen When all entries are made touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen Select additional copying features as desired Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen Enter the desired print quantity 0 Position originals FACE UP on the document handler 100 originals can be set When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make the Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 11 Press Start After copying is completed touch Chapter on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine OO ON OD s NOTES 1 Entering 0 or the same page number twice will be ignored on the screen 2 Chapter insertions occur in sequence even if original page numbers are entered out of sequence 3 When a page number is larger that the total original page count insertion occurs as the last page of the document Applications 9 9 Applications Combination Use this function to lay out and copy a fixed number 2 4 or 8 of pages onto one sheet of copy paper 2 in 1 4in 1 or 8 in 1 Combination Specifications
319. selection screen Touch Book Copy to display the Book copy screen with AUTO layout and Non image area erase selected Touch Full scan Front cover Full scan or Front Back cover Full scan as required To change the binding mode touch REVERSE THE SIDE OF OPEN PAGE Touch OK to return to the Application selection screen Make additional copying selections Touch OK to return to the Basic screen with the Store mode automatically selected Select 1 1 or 1 2 copy mode and enter the print quantity amount Position the open book in the right rear corner on the platen glass Align the edges of the book with the right measuring guide plate then press Start to begin scanning Repeat Steps 9 to 10 to copy subsequent pages from the book pressing Start to scan each page Touch STORE to remove its highlight and thus turn off the Store mode Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine Program Job p 9 21 1 Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen 2 Touch Program Job to scan multiple sets of originals in different settings called OO OO OO 1 JOBs and then to output them all as a complete set Make additional copying selections for the first JOB Touch OK to return to the Basic screen Store mode is automatically selected Position original s face up in the EDH document handler tray or face down on the platen glass select the tray you want to use then press Start
320. splayed to access the Key operator mode See p 14 2 Control panel contrast key Weekly timer key Help Screen OD e Q SI FOR ASSISTANCE PAPER SUPPLY HELP MENU ABCDE 12345 TEL STAPLE Mode Check Help SUPPLY PAPER TELEPHONE eu SUPPLY 012 345 6789 e Z PAPER PAPER SUPPLY SUPPLY FAX Program Memory TRIMMER PAPER 987 654 3210 V SUPPLY 4 KEY OPERATOR Panel Reset MODE Help Menu Screen 1 Hard keys 2 EDH Platen glass 3 Basic mode 4 Application mode 5 Special original 6 Output mode d Program memory Basic Operations 6 39 Basic Operations Help Mode continued 1 While in any screen press Help to display the Help Screen 2 Touch TONER SUPPLY PAPER SUPPLYs EDH STAPLE SUPPLY TRIMMER FOR ASSISTANCE or the Service call telephone number and Fax number to display specific Help information 3 For help on operations touch HELP MENU in the center area of the screen The Help Menu Screen will be displayed Select one of the 7 Help menu items 4 The Weekly timer key display only when the Weekly timer system is activated Touch the key to display the settings of the Weekly timer 5 Touch EXIT to return to the screen that was displayed before pressing Help 6 40 Basic Operations Basic Operations Using the Multi Sheet Bypass Tray The Multi sheet bypass tray can be used to stack regular 16 lb 45 lb Bond paper CT Bypass tray paper size 11 x17 5 5 x
321. store the job under that number The key with a lock icon 9 displayed is locked and cannot be selected Arrow keys can be used to scroll to the next previous page The selected number key will be highlighted 6 Touch OK on the Job No Selection Screen to display the Job Name Registration Screen If you do not wish to enter a name touch OK The key displays Ikki kk kk ek zk keck iN place of a name 7 Enter a job name in up to 16 characters using the touch screen alphabet keypad To correct an entry touch DELETE repeatedly to delete each character entered then enter the correct job name 8 If the Job name is correct touch OK to resume the Job No Selection Screen To re enter the Job name touch CANCEL to return to the Job Name Registration Screen 9 When the Job No Selection Screen is displayed touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen To exit from the Program Memory setting anytime press Panel Reset NOTES 1 A locked job is indicated by a lock icon on the Job key number 2 Only the key operator can lock a job 3 A locked job cannot be overwritten unless it is unlocked by the key operator 4 A blank key indicates that no job is stored under that key 5 kee de ee kk kee ee dee displayed on a Job number key indicates that a job is stored but unnamed 6 Program Memory entries can be recorded on the Program Memory Form included at the end of this section Program Memory 10 3 Program Memory
322. t Stapling amp Folding 16 sheets 15 sheets when using thick cover paper Folding and Trimming 3 sheets Stapling amp Folding and Trimming 16 sheets 15 sheets when using thick cover paper O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A4R CT Paper weight 16 24 Ib Special stock 20 lb paper is recommended CT Booklet tray capacity When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded the finisher will stop operating Select an appropriate print quantity referring to the following capacity Approx 100 sheets max Folding 33 sets max of 3 sheet folded booklet 33 x 3 99 sheets Stapling amp Folding 20 sets max of 5 sheet folded booklet 20 x 5 100 sheets 6 sets max of 15 sheet folded booklet 6 x 15 90 sheets O Trimming unit tray capacity When the Trimming unit tray capacity is exceeded the finisher and Trimming unit will stop operating Select an appropriate print quantity referring to the following capacity Approx 512 sheets max Folding and Trimming 100 sets max of 3 sheet folded booklet 300 sheets max Stapling amp Folding and Trimming 100 sets max of 2 5 sheet folded booklet 500 sheets max 50 sets max of 6 10 sheet folded booklet 500 sheets max 32 sets max of 11 16 sheet folded booklet 512 sheets max CT Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions with Booklet selected APS Sort Staple sort Group Cover sheet feeding 1 1 2 1 Rotation Sort Rotation Group Output Modes 7 13 Output Modes Folding
323. t p 4 To clear an incorrect entry touch DELETE or press C The insertion location will be deleted When setting more than 15 locations touch the arrow key to move to the next page NOTES 1 The page numbers entered at random will be sorted automatically 2 The same page number will be ignored if entered for the second time 7 The tray sources for covers and insertions currently selected are displayed on the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen Touch CHANGE OF THE COVERS TRAY or CHANGE OF THE INSERTION TRAY to select another tray if desired Every touching the key shifts the selection in the display that includes paper type if specified in Key operator mode When all settings are completed touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 8 Select additional copying features as desired 9 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 10 Enter the desired print quantity 11 Position originals FACE UP in the document handler When using Platen store mode see p 6 27 to p 6 28 When using EDH store mode see p 6 29 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make the Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 34 to p 6 36 12 Press Start After copying is completed touch Sheet Cover Insertion on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine Applications 9 7 Applications Chapter Chapter is used with
324. t remove warning caution labels If any warning caution label is removed or if any warning caution label or caution indicator is illegible due to soilage clean the label If cleaning does not render the label legible please contact your service representative Safety Information 2 5 Safety Information Machine Installation and Power Requirements A caution FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN BODILY INJURY AND OR MACHINE DAMAGE O FIRE PREVENTION Install machine away from flammable or volatile materials Routinely check for abnormal heat from power cord and or plug C SHORT CIRCUIT FROM WATER DAMAGE Do not install or operate this equipment outdoors near a lake pond or river etc and do not allow the machine to come in contact with splashes of rain water or any liquid O TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY Install the machine away from direct sunlight heat sources stoves heaters and cold temperatures air conditioners Avoid any environment that is outside 50 C 86 F 10 30 C with 10 80 humidity VENTILATION Do not allow the machine to come in contact with dust or ammonia gas or fumes from printing or cleaning solutions etc otherwise image quality will be poor Install the machine in a well ventilated area for comfort otherwise an ozone odor will be detected during large copy runs When in use the D copier generates ozone in amounts too small to be hazardous to the human body Tem
325. t the count for all ECM accounts ECM Setting Menu Screen ECM All Count Reset Screen elect one of follo g 1 ECM data edit E C M all count reset E C M function setting PREYIOUS PREYIOUS SCREEN SCREEN a4 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 4 E C M function setting The ECM Master Key Code Screen displays if a code is required 3 Enter your 8 digit ECM master key code then touch OK to display the ECM Setting Menu Screen See note 2 4 Touch 2 E C M all count reset The ECM All Count Reset Screen will be displayed 5 Touch YES to reset all counters to zero and to return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen Or touch NO to cancel Touching PREVIOUS SCREEN will also cancel this function and return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen 6 If other ECM setting changes are required touch desired key from 1 3 7 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 8 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOTES 1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid A doit password 2 H an invalid ECM master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 8 digit code
326. terrupt Password Setting 14 36 Timer Setting 14 31 Toner cartridge 3 4 Toner unit 3 4 Total counter 5 8 Touch Screen 3 10 Transparency Interleave 9 15 Trash Basket 3 6 Tray Size Setting 14 38 Trimmer Stacker Cover 3 6 Trimming unit 3 6 Trimming unit tray 3 6 Trimming mode 7 13 U Univ key 6 18 Unsuitable EDH Originals 4 3 User management list 14 46 User Setting Mode 14 12 USER1 key 14 12 USER2 key 14 13 V Vertical Horizontal Zoom 6 16 Very High Mode 8 4 W WARNING 2 2 WATERMARK 9 38 WATERMARK NUMBERING 9 38 Weekly Timer 14 28 Weekly Timer Function 5 6 Weekly timer key 6 39 Weekly Timer Master Key Code 3 12 WHOLE AREA key 8 12 Wide size paper key 6 20 Work table 3 3 Z Z Folded Original 8 10 ZOOM key 6 15 Zoom Mode 6 15 4 Index 2001 4 MINOLTA Copyright 2000 MINOLTA CO LTD The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice to incorporate improvements made on the product or products the manual covers Minolta Co Ltd 3 13 2 Chome Azuchi Machi Chuo ku Osaka 541 8556 Japan
327. that you contact your service representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine When memory overflow occurs the following screen will be displayed to enable you to take an appropriate measure for the current job situation Memory Overflow Management Screen Align original on EDH unit LADD TONER SS OUTPUT FUNCTION S Al SPECIAL ORIGINAL OUTPUT APPL SCAN scan is stopped scanned data is output a bas P CONTINUE if memory is free scan is continued SORT continue E STORE When memory overflow occurs while scanning the first job the machine stops immediately and the screen provides JOB STOP and SCAN STOP as the only two available options NOTE If the job settings include Booklet mode SCAN STOP will disappear e To delete all the scanned data and discontinue the job touch JOB STOP e To give up further scanning but print out all the data already scanned into memory touch SCAN STOP When memory ov
328. the front and the left side to the edge of the paper 3 When paper is seated properly push the tray back fully into the copier NOTE Do not bump the tray into the main body otherwise machine trouble may be caused Maintenance amp Supplies 15 3 Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper continued Loading Paper in Tray 4 C 305 C 305L When displaying Thick 1 or Thick 2 on the tray key of the Basic Screen be sure to load the specified paper otherwise mishandled paper may occur When displaying TAB on the tray key of the Basic Screen see p 15 6 C 305 1 Open the LCC upper door 2 Press the paper loading button to lower the bottom plate of the LCC 3 Load the fixed size paper into the LCC with the paper curl turning downward 4 Repeat the steps 2 and 3 until the bottom plate cannot go down any more Load size 8 5 x11 or A4 service adjustable for C 305 or load size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R A3 B4 A4 A4R or F4 for C 305L Do not stack paper above the paper hook level 5 Close the LCC upper door 15 4 Maintenance amp Supplies Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper continued Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 1 2 or 3 Load offset tabbed sheets so that the tab extensions are on the left at the rear not front of the tray When loading tabbed sheets in the tray be sure to specify the paper type as TAB in the Key operator mode otherwise m
329. ting Menu Screen See note 2 NOTES 1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit code 3 Touch 5 Timer interrupt password set to display the Timer Interrupt Password Setting Screen 4 Use the touch screen keypad to enter a 4 digit password and then touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen NOTE When the password setting is 0000 timer interrupt can be used simply by turning the copier OFF then ON In this case you will be asked to enter the duration of use a period of time to turn the copier power on 5 If other Weekly timer settings are required select another desired menu item from 1 5 6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 7 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations 14 36 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Control Panel Adjustment 10 Use this feature to check the LCD touch screen and realign the position of the touch sensor that may have shifted Key Operator Mode Screen Control Panel Adjustment Screen Control panel adjustment CHECK BUTTON one of following ite 1 System initial setting 6 Paper type Special size set
330. tive and report the condition and code No 16 2 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Call for Service continued Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble If the message shown below is displayed on the Call for Service Screen you may continue operating the copier on a limited function basis and utilize the trays and ADU that are not affected by the trouble To obtain this limited functionality of the copier consult your service representative Be sure to utilize the limited function only temporarily and arrange for machine repair immediately 1 If limited use of the copier is available the following message is displayed in the message area instead of the Report code Tray 1 failure Press AUTO to select except this tray 2 Press Panel Reset Please switch ON OFF E 18 2 3 Turn OFF then ON the power switch A copying job can be continued without using the troubled portion of the machine ex Tray 1 AA CAUTION EVEN IF THE COPYING JOB CAN BE CONTINUED WITH THE ABOVE OPERATION IMMEDIATELY CONTACT YOUR SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE WHEN THE CALL FOR SERVICE SCREEN IS DISPLAYED Troubleshooting 16 3 Troubleshooting Memory Overflow In certain modes the Di750 uses memory for convenience and to make operations flow smoothly Occasional memory overflow may occur if the installed memory is inadequate for the copy conditions selected Should memory overflow occur frequently it is recommended
331. to scan When scanning for the current JOB is completed the popup menu will be displayed To store the current JOB images touch DECISION To delete the images touch CANCEL Repeat steps 3 to 6 until all JOB originals are scanned Select the desired output mode and enter the print quantity amount Touch STORE to remove its highlight and thus turn off the Store mode Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine Non Image Area Erase p 9 23 Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch Non Image Area Erase Make additional copying selections Touch OK to return to the Basic screen Enter the print quantity amount Position original face down on the platen glass keeping the document handler cover open Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 13 6 Shortcuts Shortcuts Reverse Image p 9 25 OO Ww N N Touch APPLI to display the Application selection screen Touch Reverse Image to switch from the black on white copying mode to white on black copying Make additional copying selections Touch OK to return to the Basic screen Enter the print quantity amount Position original s face up on the EDH document handler tray or face down on the platen glass Press Start When copying is completed press Panel Reset to reset the machine Repeat Image p 9 26 1 2 3 o Joo E
332. tor Mode 14 31 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Timer Setting 2 continued 5 To set the ON OFF time collectively for more than one day of the week touch Collectively timer setting to display the Weekly Timer On Off Time Collective Setting Screen When you open this screen the ON and OFF times are always set at 00 00 00 00 Touch to highlight the day s of the week to be set More than one can be selected at a time Enter the ON time and OFF time using the touch screen keypad and then touch SET after each entry Touch OK on the Weekly Timer On Off Time Setting Screen or on the Weekly Timer On Off Time Collective Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen If other Weekly timer settings are required select another desired menu item from 1 5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen If other key operator settings are required select the desired menu item from 1 to 18 10 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations 14 32 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Timer Action On Off Setting 3 Use this function to set the On Off condition of the copier for a given month Set the On Off condition for specific days or collectively for all Mondays through Sundays of the given month The default setting is collective On for Mo
333. two userset density levels and three USERSETs of magnification User Density Level 1 Setting 1 Output copying samples from 16 density levels from Lighter to Normal or Normal to Darker then select the desired exposure and program it as USER 1 The programmed copy density can be recalled by selecting USER 1 on the Basic Screen User Setting Mode Menu Screen User Density Level 1 Setting Screen ample o e A Darker i Sample Output 1 2 Darker Lighter NO 1 DEE 16 1 4 5 8 4 1 Juser density level 1 setting User density level 2 setting User lens mode ratio setting Normal NO 3 WA 16 9 12f 13 16 7 Set density 14 2 Lighter 1 ER ow 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter a 4 digit key operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 3 User setting mode to display the User Setting Mode Menu Screen then touch 1 User density level 1 setting to display the User Density Level 1 Setting Screen 3 Place the original on the platen glass or in the EDH 4 Touch Darker or Lighter to select the density level to be programmed 5 Touch No 1 1 4 No 2 5 8 No 3 9 12 No 4 13 16 or Set density then press Start The density level sample sheet will be output 6 Select the desired exposure from the sample sheet s then e
334. u may scan multiple sets of originals and apply different settings on each set referred to as JOB then output them all as a complete set g g g g OO OO U Scan and store originals into memory then print all the pages collectively Max 100 JOBs can be programmed for an output job Available original sizes vary conforming to copy conditions selected for each JOB Copy size specified for the first JOB cannot be changed Only the trays containing the same paper size can be designated for subsequent JOBs Once specified paper type size setting for Multi sheet bypass tray cannot be changed for another JOB Output mode settings cannot be specified for each JOB The last settings made will be applied to all JOBs Print quantity cannot be specified for each JOB Entered quantity will be the number of complete copied sets and can be changed anytime before printing The image data scanned into memory using Program Job mode can be stored in HDD using Image Store amp Output Mode in server function See p 11 7 to p 11 8 Program Job settings cannot be stored in Program Memory Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions APS Change copy size Rotation Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Folding Stapling amp Folding Trimming Server function Incompatible Special Originals Using Normal High Very High with 600dpi Mixed Original Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Inte
335. uch Sheet Cover Insertion to display the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen 3 Select Front Cover Insertion if desired Touch FRONT COPY to insert a copied front cover or FRONT BLANK to insert a blank front cover Proceed to step 4 to select Back Cover Insertion if desired Proceed to step 5 to select Sheet Insertion if desired 4 Select Back Cover Insertion Touch BACK COPY to insert a copied back cover or BACK BLANK to insert a blank back cover Return to step 3 to select Front Cover Insertion if desired Proceed to step 5 to select Sheet Insertion if desired 5 Select Sheet Insertion Touch COPY INSERTION to insert copied sheets or BLANK INSERTION to insert blank sheets Return to step 3 to select Front Cover Insertion if desired Return to step 4 to select Back Cover Insertion if desired 9 6 Applications Applications Sheet Cover Insertion continued 6 The page setting area of the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen displays 15 keys to designate each insertion location The first upper left key displays the Front Cover icon if selected The Back Cover icon appears if selected as the last fixed key with one active blank key preceding it See the previous page Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of each insertion location Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key Example If p 4 is entered in blank mode a blank sheet will be inserted between p 4 and p 5 in copy mode a copied sheet is inserted a
336. ue by entering the valid 8 digit code 4 Touch 1 E C M data edit The ECM Data Edit Screen will be displayed To change add or delete the ECM data and to reset the copy count of the individual account follow the procedure for each as described below To Change ECM Data 1 Touch A or w key on the right side of the list to highlight the ECM data to be changed then touch Change The ECM Data Change Screen will be displayed 2 Touch the desired item key to highlight it then enter new data by using the touch screen keypad Password 8 digits max See note 1 Name 8 characters max See note 2 Limit 999 999 copies max NOTES 1 We recommend that you make a list of all ECM passwords and account numbers 2 If an invalid user name is entered continue by the valid name 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and to verify whether the same password or name has been already used for another account No When a password is duplicated The Password Duplication Screen will be displayed Touch YES to re enter new password or NO to create duplicate password NOTE If duplicate password is created the number of copies will be counted only for the ECM password with the smallest No We recommend you do not use duplicate ECM password When a name is duplicated The Name Duplication Screen will be displayed Touch OK to re enter new name 14 18 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4
337. ulting in dark lines on the copies Raise the document cover and clean the left partition glass with a clean soft cloth Cleaning the Document Glass and Cover The platen glass and the inner surface of the document handler should be kept clean Otherwise soil marks may be copied Raise the document cover and clean the glass and inner surface of the document cover with a clean soft cloth NOTES 1 The glass may also be cleaned with a soft cloth dampened slightly with water or with an antistatic cleaner recommended by your service representative 2 Never use paint solvents such as benzene or thinners to clean any portion of the copier Maintenance amp Supplies 15 11 Section 16 Troubleshooting Call for Service Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble Memory Overflow Power OFF ON Screen Clearing Mishandled Paper Copying Hints Troubleshooting 16 1 Troubleshooting Call for Service A CAUTION A Call for Service message indicates a machine condition that requires the attention of your service representative Call for Service Screen TELEPHONE 1234567890123456 FAX 1234567890123456 1 Immediately make note of the Report code No indicated in the upper portion of the screen 2 Turn OFF the main power switch 3 Unplug the machine 4 Contact your service representa
338. up group exit CT Face down rotation group exit Face up rotation group exit Originals 9 1 z Example 3 set copies Face down Face down Face down Face down non sort default rotation sort group rotation group Face up Face up Face up Face up non sort rotation sort group rotation group O 3 Si GA 7 20 Output Modes Output Modes Output Mode for Machine without Finisher continued Face Down Exit e Non sort mode copies the original set in amounts determined by the print quantity setting then outputs sorted sets normally e Rotation sort mode rotates every other sorted sets by 90 upon exit provided the same paper size is loaded in two trays one tray with paper loaded in crosswise orientation and the other tray with paper loaded in lengthwise orientation e Group mode copies each original page in amounts determined by the print quantity setting then outputs grouped sets normally Rotation group mode rotates every other grouped set by 90 upon exit provided the same paper size is loaded in two trays one tray with paper loaded in crosswise orientation and the other tray with paper loaded in lengthwise orientation e g 8 5 x11 and 8 5 x11 R Basic Screen COPY DENSITY COPY SIZE USER2 USERI A NORMAI v EES LENS MODE 1 00 AMS 1
339. upper left corner key in the page setting area of the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen The tray source will be the same as that for back cover and can be selected and displayed on the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen Back Cover Mode This mode is classified as Back copy and Back blank The Back copy mode copies and inserts a plain or colored sheet into the finished set as a Back cover The Back blank mode inserts a non copied plain or colored sheet into the finished set as a Back cover When either Back copy or Back blank is selected its icon will appear as the last fixed key with one active blank key preceding it in the page setting area of the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen The tray source will be the same as that for front cover and can be selected and displayed on the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen The insertion type can be selected separately for front cover back cover and insertion sheets This allows multiple combinations such as blank front cover and copied insertions See the following illustration for details 9 4 Applications Applications Sheet Cover Insertion continued Basic Functions 10 SEKR 314 SURVEYOR S 2 REPORT SURVEYOR S REPORT Panty Originals Copies FRONT COVER COPIED 10 SEN el Ps SURVEYOR TT Originals Copies FRONT COVER BLANK eet Toph el Fl 2 3 SURVEYOR S 517 SURVEYOR S REPORT REPORT
340. uspension in the secondary copier takes a long time the Allocation recovery mode will activate enabling the primary copier to handle the remaining print quantity 2 Touch CONTINUE to go on or EXIT to delete all the data transmitted to the secondary copier and to release the tandem mode The primary copier will take over the remaining print quantity and complete the job NOTE Once the Allocation recovery mode is activated and the primary copier is already handling the remaining print quantity the secondary copier cannot continue with the tandem printing job even when CONTINUE is touched on the popup menu Tandem Mode 12 5 Tandem Mode Troubleshooting Copying with the Allocation recovery mode The Allocation recovery mode enables you to complete your copying job even when trouble occurs in either the primary or secondary copier such as a paper jam In that case the copier that is trouble free completes the job NOTE The copier is initially set to activate this function Contact your service representative if you do not require this function When a paper jam SC code E code F code trouble or unloaded paper occurs on either the primary or secondary copier The copier that is trouble free handles the remaining print quantity and completes the job When the job is completed take the appropriate troubleshooting measures to correct the problem When memory overflow occurs on either the primary or secondary copier On t
341. utput Menu Screen Select finisher mode Staple position displayed as the placed originals JOB 10 EXIT TRAY STAPLE lt 1POS gt STAPLE lt 2POS gt OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt g COVER SUB ai al A Al SHEET TRAY i Se e Al Wl a J so CH i STAPLING FS MAIN v V kl Vi Gelee TRAY J v V IW MI FOLDING HDD RECALL STORE STANDARD CANCEL J oK 2 Touch OK on the Output Menu Screen The Basic Screen will be restored with the OUTPUT APPLI highlighted 11 Enter the desired print quantity 12 Position letter size originals FACE UP in crosswise orientation onto the document handler When using Platen store mode see p 6 27
342. utton will turn green NOTE Refer to the specifications on previous page for available paper size in each mode 2 Press Staple Mode Selection button to select the desired staple mode 3 Press Staple Start Stop button Stapled sheets will be delivered to the appropriate tray according to the selected staple mode NOTE CLOSE THE TRIMMER STACKER COVER otherwise the machine cannot print copy DO NOT OPEN THE TRIMMER STACKER COVER DURING PRINTING COPYING otherwise the machine will cease operating and a paper misfeed will occur NOTE If you want to stop the manual stapling operation press the Staple Start Stop button again The finisher will cease operating When using Stapling amp Folding mode the unfinished set will be left in the stacker unit inside the finisher A CAUTION When the Booklet tray Trimming unit tray capacity is exceeded the finisher will cease operating To avoid such trouble select an appropriate print quantity from the specifications on p 7 13 A CAUTION When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected remove the copied sets as they exit otherwise mishandled paper will occur Output Modes 7 19 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine without Finisher This section describes eight output modes for a copier without the Finisher CT Face down nor sort exit default CT Face up non sort exit CT Face down rotation sort exit Face up rotation sort exit CT Face down group exit CT Face
343. vailable to be set after the copier starts to scan the current job When setting more than one reserve job the next reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to scan for the previous reserve job When the current job is under Store mode Image insert or Book copy the reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to print the current job O If certain conditions occur while a reserve job is being set such as activation of Interrupt mode mishandled paper or depletion of paper the current printing job will cease and the FREE JOB indicator on the screen will be replaced by INTERRUPT JAM or ADD PAPER as appropriate Perform the required measure for the situation at hand The order of the reserve jobs can be altered on the Job Status Screen The reserve jobs can be deleted on the Job Status Screen Incompatible Basic Copy Conditions Interrupt copying Scanning in Store mode Proof copy Incompatible Special original Resolution Very High Incompatible Applications Program Job Overlay auau Basic Screen reserve job available Reserve Job Setting Screen Align original on EDH unit amp Press START to scan originals
344. ve the same optional configuration except for the option cassette C 305 C 305L J Two copiers should be turned on and ready for copying O The copier with the TANDEM key highlighted on the Finisher Mode Selection Screen will be the primary master copier turning both copiers into the tandem mode Select the copying conditions scan originals and press Start on the primary copier to operate both copiers in tandem to complete a job CT Print quantity must be set for 3 or more copies to activate the tandem mode When the print quantity entered is an odd number the primary copier will copy and output one sheet set more than the secondary copier to accommodate the job CT Auto low power Auto shut off may function while tandem mode is selected e If the tandem mode is selected while the secondary copier is in Auto low power mode the energy saver mode will be released automatically e The tandem mode will not be selected when the secondary copier is turned off by Auto shut off Release the Auto shut off mode by pressing Energy Saver On Off e If Auto low power is activated on the secondary copier during the tandem job setting the energy saver mode will be released automatically when printing job starts e If Auto shut off is activated on the secondary copier during the tandem job setting the tandem mode will be released automatically e If Auto low power Auto shut off is activated on the primary copier the tandem mode will be released automatica
345. vity 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Store mode is selected automatically Select basic copying and special original features on the Basic Screen and Special Original Screen as desired 6 Position original s FACE UP in the document handler or FACE DOWN on the platen glass select the tray you want to use then press Start to scan 7 When scanning for the current JOB is completed the popup menu will be displayed in the Basic Screen To store the current JOB images touch DECISION To delete the images touch CANCEL 8 Repeat steps 3 to 7 until all JOB originals are scanned IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN EACH ORIGINAL SET IN THE CORRECT ORDER OF PAGINATION 9 Select the desired output mode 10 Enter the desired print quantity 11 Touch STORE on the Basic Screen to exit the Store mode To delete the scanned data without printing press Stop then touch CANCEL on the popup menu to ensure that you delete the data 12 Press Start The copier Starts the printing job After copying is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 22 Applications Applications Non Image Area Erase The Non image area erase mode is used to copy non standard or special originals such as books magazines paste ups graphs thin or thick materials etc from the platen glass The exposed glass area outside the borders of the original will
346. when the Paper empty indicator is flashing Do not exceed the following tray limits Tray 1 500 sheets 20Ib 430 sheets 24lb Tray 2 500 sheets 20lb 430 sheets 24lb Tray 3 1 000 sheets 20lb 860 sheets 24lb Tray 4 4 000 sheets 20lb Multi sheet bypass tray 150 sheets 20lb Do not load above the red line on rear guide Using the Help Key To learn how to load paper at any time press Help then touch any tray to display instructions on the touch screen For details on tray position size vs paper size see Section 4 Paper Information Before loading paper fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together When placing a stack of paper into the tray be sure to load it with S the curl turning up i e with concave side up See the following pages for instructions on loading paper in trays 1 4 15 2 Maintenance amp Supplies Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper continued Loading Paper in Tray 1 2 and 3 When displaying Thick 1 or Thick 2 on the tray key of the Basic Screen be sure to load the specified paper otherwise mishandled paper may occur When displaying TAB on the tray key of the Basic Screen see p 15 5 1 Withdraw tray 1 2 or 3 and place paper on the tray with the curl side turning up Load size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R or 5 5 x8 5 user adjustable Do not stack paper above the red line level 2 Move the green levers located at
347. with the first page 4 Enter the print quantity using the keypad The entered quantity will be displayed on the upper right message area of the Basic Screen To change the print quantity press C and re enter the correct quantity 5 Press Start to scan the originals 6 Repeat steps 3 and 5 until all originals are scanned To delete the scanned data without printing press Stop then touch CANCEL on the popup menu to ensure that you delete the data 7 Touch STORE to exit the Store mode 8 Press Start The copier starts the printing job Basic Operations 6 29 Basic Operations Rotation 90 Rotation This function allows you to utilize APS or AMS and copy the original size documents described below onto size 8 5 x11 or 5 5 x8 5 irrespective of the copy paper feeding direction By default Rotation requires APS or AMS to function however the key operator may set the function to always function or when APS AMS or reduce functions See p 14 40 to p 14 45 O Rotation copying uses memory O Copy size 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 R lengthwise type feeding only CT Original size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R CT Incompatible Basic Copying Condition V H zoom Rotation Sort Rotation Group g g Incompatible Special Original Resolution Very high Incompatible Applications Book Copy Non Image Area Erase Repeat except 2 4 8 Repeat AUTO Layout Storing image in Overlay M
348. without Finisher continued Face Up Exit continued Basic Screen Output Menu Screen Align original on EDH 0 UTPUT OUTPUT MODE f FACE GROUP up nE OUTPUT APPLI ROTATION_ FACE GROUP DOWN SORT To Set Face Up Rotation Group Exit 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Menu Screen 2 Touch ROTATION GROUP and FACE UP to highlight it 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 7 26 Output Modes Select condition to scan originals Section 8 Special Original Special Original Screen Resolution Image Quality High Mode Very High Mode 600 Dpi Text Photo Enhance Special Original Mixed Original Z Folded Original SDF Single Document Feed Original Form SS Increase T Contrast Photo Text Mixed Original i f Z Folded 4 i original LS Sc SDF E F E f E Tab paper D RECALL STANDARD CANCEL ok Special Original 8 1 Special Original Special Original Screen When SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen is touched the Special Original Screen will be displayed If one function on the menu is incompatible with another it will appear dimmed The function keys initially selected for each of four sections are highlighted Touch and highlight the des
349. y the key operator the message shown in Step 3 will display instead 5 6 Copier Management Copier Management Weekly Timer Function continued 2 Enter a 4 digit number timer interrupt password using the keypad on the control panel If an invalid password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password Timer interrupt mode Enter password les sl sl AE Be a a ae 3 Press the Start Input copy time 0 hour s 05 minute s 4 Enter a 1 digit hour ex 3 hour is 3 using the keypad on the control panel 0 9 5 Press the Start Input copy time is 3 hour s 05 minute s 6 Enter a 2 digit minutes ex 7 minutes is 07 using the keypad on the control panel 05 60 Input copy time is 3 hour s 07 minute s 7 Press the Start Copying is available until the set time is up Align original on EDH unit 8 When timer interrupt of the copier is finished press the Energy Saver On Off The Shut Off Setting Screen will be displayed Shut Off Setting Screen Align original on EDH unit
350. ying jobs which can be recalled at any time The stored jobs can be given alphabetical names O All copying functions can be selected Control Panel Job No Selection Screen f 1 ABC CORPORATION 7 2 Mode Check Help 3 lt u Program Memory 4 TEST COPY Ei 5 Panel Reset Job Store Check Screen CHECK MODE BASIC amp SPECIAL ORIG Copy Quantity 9999 Exit Tray Main tray Duplex Mode 1 2 EDH Enhance Mode Photo Mode Copy Density Baas Special Orig Z Folded Original Lens Mode 1 00 Original STD size Paper Type Recycle Output Mod i CSS staple sort Job Name Registration Screen aracte d e job 4 B K L u y H 1 1 CHARACTER DELETE 10 2 Program Memory Program Memory Job Store continued 1 Make job selections from the Basic Screen Application Selection Screen Special Original Screen and or Output Selection Screen 2 When all selections are made press Program Memory on the Control panel to display the Job No Selection Screen 3 Touch STORE The Job Store Check Screen displays to enable you to review the settings See sample Job Store Check Screen previous page 4 If settings are correct touch OK to restore the Job No Selection Screen Otherwise touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen and make new selections 5 When the Job No Selection Screen is restored touch one of the keys numbered from 1 30 to
351. ze e Select Non STD size to display the popup menu to enter the paper size by using arrow keys or touch screen keypad e Select Wide paper to display the popup menu to show available wide paper sizes to be specified Use arrow keys on the popup menu to select the desired wide size then touch Input size to display the popup menu to enter the paper size by using arrow keys or touch screen keypad Touch Lead edge or Rear edge to select the image starting position 3 Touch OK on the Paper Type Setting Screen or on the Special Size Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen 4 If other key operator settings are required touch desired key from 1 to 18 5 If no further changes are required touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations NOTE If an invalid Key operator password is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit password Key Operator Mode 14 25 Key Operator Mode Panel Contrast Key Sound Adjustment 7 Use this feature to adjust the level of brightness of the touch screen portion of the control panel and also the volume of the touch key Key Operator Mode Screen Panel Contrast Key Sound Adjustment Screen 1 System initial setting 6 Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj Panel contrast adjustment ehn A leen User setting mode Key operator data setting E C M function setting 9

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

TortoiseSVN. Manual de usuario  Catalog  20 h 45 (100`) film** de J. Doillon Le petit criminel  KitchenAid 5KSM150PS  OTOLIFT ONE - Dolphin Lifts Western  RAVE Water Sports Equipment User Manual  marine amplified omnidirectional outdoor hdtv antenna by winegard  HEARTSTART MRx - Laerdal Medical    Avaya Business Communications Manager 50 Installation and Maintenance Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file